advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 440
Versiv ™ Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook May 2013 ©2013 Fluke Corporation All product names are trademarks of their respective companies. LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke Networks product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period for the mainframe is one year and begins on the date of purchase. Parts, accessories, product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days, unless otherwise stated. Ni-Cad, Ni-MH and Li-Ion batteries, cables or other peripherals are all considered parts or accessories. The warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke Networks authorized reseller, and does not apply to any product which, in Fluke Networks’ opinion, has been misused, abused, altered, neglected, contaminated, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke Networks warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke Networks does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption. Fluke Networks authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Networks. Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke Networks authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke Networks reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country. Fluke Networks warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke Networks option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke Networks authorized service center within the warranty period. To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke Networks authorized service center to obtain return authorization information, then send the product to that service center, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB destination). Fluke Networks assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB destination). If Fluke Networks determines that failure was caused by neglect, misuse, contamination, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling, or normal wear and tear of mechanical components, Fluke Networks will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB Shipping point). THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE NETWORKS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY. Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decisionmaker of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. 4/04 Fluke Networks PO Box 777 Everett, WA 98206-0777 USA Contents Chapter 1 Get Acquainted Overview of Features ......................................................1 Safety Information ...................................................2 For the Versiv Main Unit ..........................................2 For DSX Modules and Twisted Pair Adapters .........4 For CertiFiber Pro OLTS Modules .............................5 For OptiFiber Pro OTDR Modules ............................6 Contact Fluke Networks .................................................8 Register Your Product ....................................................9 Additional Resources ......................................................9 Supplements and Updated Manuals .............................9 Versiv Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs .......................10 AC Adapter and Battery .................................................13 Charge the Battery ...................................................13 Check the Battery Status ..........................................14 How to Use the Touchscreen .........................................16 The HOME Screen ...........................................................19 How to Enter Text ...........................................................22 Set User Preferences .......................................................23 Language ..................................................................23 Date and Time Settings and Formats ......................24 Number Format ........................................................24 Units for Length Measurements ..............................25 Power-Down and Backlight Timeout Periods .........25 Audible Tone ............................................................25 i Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Power Line Frequency ............................................. 26 Display Brightness .................................................... 26 Import User Preferences from a File ....................... 26 Overview of Memory Functions .................................... 27 How to Install a Strap .................................................... 28 How to Remove or Install a Module ............................. 28 About LinkWare and LinkWare Stats Software ........... 30 Chapter 2 Get Started Tutorial: Certify Twisted Pair Cabling ........................... 31 Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available .......... 32 Step 2: Set Up a Twisted Pair Test ........................... 32 Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function ............... 34 Step 4: Do an Autotest ............................................ 34 Step 5: Look at the Results ...................................... 34 Step 6: Save the Results ........................................... 36 Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling ............................. 36 Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available .......... 36 Step 2: Set Up a Loss/Length Test ........................... 38 Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function ............... 39 Step 4: Set the Reference ........................................ 40 Step 5: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cords You Will Add ................................ 42 Step 6: Do an Autotest in Smart Remote Mode .... 43 Step 7: Look at the Results ...................................... 44 Step 8: Save the Results ........................................... 44 Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test ....................... 45 Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available .......... 46 Step 2: Set Up an OTDR Test ................................... 46 Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function ............... 47 ii Contents Step 4: Give Names to the Ends of the Fiber ..........48 Step 5: Set Up Launch Fiber Compensation ............48 Step 6: Do an OTDR Test from End 1 ......................49 Step 7: Look at the Results from End 1 ...................51 Step 8: Save the Results from End 1 ........................52 Step 9: Do the OTDR Test from End 2 .....................52 Step 10: Save the Results from End 2 ......................52 Step 11: Look at the Saved Results ..........................52 Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results ............................53 Options for Cable IDs ......................................................54 Automatic Increment Function for Cable IDs .........56 Auto Save Function ..................................................56 Tutorial: Make a Set of Sequential Cable IDs .........57 About Projects .................................................................58 Chapter 3 How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Overview of the DSX CableAnalyzer Modules ..............59 DSX CableAnalyzer Connectors, Keys, and LEDs ...........60 The Home Screen for DSX CableAnalyzer .....................64 Make Sure Your Tester is Ready to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling .......................................................67 About Link Interface Adapters ......................................67 Set the Reference ............................................................70 Settings for Twisted Pair Tests .......................................71 How to Do an Autotest ..................................................75 “Bad Patch Cord” Message ............................................77 Twisted Pair Autotest Results .........................................78 PASS*/FAIL* Results ..................................................79 WIRE MAP Tab ..........................................................79 PERFORMANCE Tab ..................................................84 iii Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Scalar Results ............................................................ 85 Frequency-Domain Results ...................................... 90 Insertion Loss ............................................................ 94 Return Loss ............................................................... 96 Impedance ................................................................ 98 NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) ...................................... 99 PS NEXT (Power Sum Near End Crosstalk) .............. 101 ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio at the Near End) ....................................................... 102 PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Near End) ....................................... 103 ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Far End) ... 105 PS ACR-F ................................................................... 108 CMRL (Common-Mode Return Loss) ....................... 109 CDNEXT (Common-Mode to Differential Mode Near-End Crosstalk) ................................................. 110 TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) ............................ 112 ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) ........................................ 115 DIAGNOSTIC Tab ............................................................ 116 About dB Rules ............................................................... 116 How to Use the Talk Function ....................................... 122 About the AxTalk Analyzer Kit ..................................... 123 Chapter 4 How to Test Twisted Pair Through a PoE Device How to Turn On the AC Wire Map Test ........................ 125 When to Keep the AC Wire Map Test Off .................... 125 How to Do an Autotest Through a PoE Device ............ 126 AC Wire Map Results ...................................................... 128 iv Contents Chapter 5 How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures ..............................131 The HDTDR Analyzer ......................................................135 The HDTDX Analyzer ......................................................139 How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot .................................................143 Chapter 6 How to Clean Fiber Endfaces How to Use a Fluke Networks IBC OneClick Cleaner ....150 How to Use Wipes, Swabs, and Solvent ........................152 To Clean Bulkhead Connectors ................................152 To Clean the Optical Connectors on the Modules .153 To Clean Fiber Adapters ..........................................153 To Clean Connector Ends .........................................154 Chapter 7 How to Certify Fiber Cabling Overview of the CertiFiber Pro Optical Loss Test Set Modules .............................................................155 CertiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs ....................156 How to Remove and Install the Connector Adapters ...160 The Home Screen for CertiFiber Pro Modules ...............162 Requirements for Reliable Fiber Test Results ................164 About the Reference for Fiber Tests .......................165 About Test Reference Cords and Mandrels ............167 Settings for Loss/Length Tests on Fiber .........................170 Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit ......................................................................171 About 1 Jumper Reference Connections .......................178 Autotest in Smart Remote Mode ...................................178 Step 1: Set the Reference in Smart Remote Mode .180 v Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cords You Will Add ................................ 181 Step 3: Do an Autotest in Smart Remote Mode .... 183 Autotest Results for Smart Remote Mode ............. 184 Fiber IDs for Saved Results in Smart Remote Mode 188 Autotest in Loopback Mode .......................................... 190 Step 1: Set the Reference in Loopback Mode ........ 192 Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cord You Will Add ................................. 194 Step 3: Do an Autotest in Loopback Mode ............ 195 Autotest Results for Loopback Mode ..................... 196 Autotest in Far End Source Mode ................................. 198 Auto Wavelength Modes ........................................ 198 Step 1: Set the Reference in Far End Source Mode 200 Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cord You Will Add ................................. 203 Step 3: Do an Autotest in Far End Source Mode ... 204 Autotest Results for Far End Source Mode ............ 205 Bi-Directional Tests ......................................................... 206 How to Use the Talk Function ....................................... 208 Chapter 8 The Power Meter and Light Source How to Monitor Power and Loss ................................... 209 How to Control the Light Source .................................. 213 Use the Display to Control the Main Tester’s Light Source ...................................... 214 Use the Module’s Button to Control the Light Source ....................................................... 214 Chapter 9 How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Overview of the OTDR Module ..................................... 217 vi Contents OptiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs ....................218 The Home Screen for OptiFiber Pro Modules ...............220 Settings for OTDR Tests ..................................................222 OTDR Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit ....225 About Launch and Tail Cords .........................................226 How To Compensate for Launch and Tail Cords ....227 About the Launch Events that the Tester Adds to OTDR Results ........................................................234 How to Retract the Launch/Tail Cord ......................234 OTDR Port Connection Quality ......................................236 How to Do an OTDR Test ...............................................238 OTDR Results ...................................................................242 EventMap ..................................................................242 Event Table ...............................................................248 OVERALL FIBER RESULTS Screens ............................255 EVENT DETAILS Screen .............................................257 About Measurements that Show “<“ and “>” .......259 OTDR Trace ...............................................................260 How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the OTDR Trace ........................................................262 Bi-Directional OTDR Tests ........................................264 How to Do Bi-Directional Averaging ......................267 Real Time Trace ...............................................................268 Manual OTDR Mode .......................................................270 The FaultMap Test ..........................................................274 How to Do the FaultMap Test .................................275 FaultMap Screen .......................................................278 Chapter 10 The FiberInspector Test How to Do the FiberInspector Test ................................282 vii Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use the Core Scale ............................................ 286 Chapter 11 The Visual Fault Locator Visual Fault Locator Applications .................................. 287 How to Use the VFL ........................................................ 288 Chapter 12 How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links Common Causes of Problems in Fiber Links ................. 291 Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures ............................... 292 Causes of OTDR Test Failures ......................................... 294 Chapter 13 Test Results View Saved Results ......................................................... 299 How to Add a Result to a Saved Fiber Results .............. 302 How to Replace a Saved Result that Failed .................. 303 Delete, Rename, and Move Results ............................... 304 Manage Results on a Flash Drive ................................... 305 Upload Results to a PC ................................................... 306 View the Memory Status ............................................... 308 Chapter 14 Projects Why Use Projects? .......................................................... 309 Tutorial: Make a New Project ........................................ 310 Step 1: Give the Project a Name ............................. 312 Step 2: Specify an Operator .................................... 312 Step 3: Set up Tests for the Project ......................... 313 Step 4: Make ID Sets for Twisted Pair and Fiber Cabling ............................................................ 315 Step 5: Give Names to the Ends of the Fiber for OTDR Tests ................................................ 320 Step 6: Turn on the Auto Save Function ................ 320 viii Contents Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with a CableAnalyzer Module ...................................................323 Step 1: Attach a CableAnalyzer Module .................323 Step 2: Select a Project .............................................323 Step 3: Select a Test for Twisted Pair Cable ............324 Step 4: Do an Autotest .............................................325 Step 5: Monitor the Status of Your Project ............325 Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro Modules ....................326 Step 1: Attach an OptiFiber Pro Module .................328 Step 2: Select a Project .............................................328 Step 3: Select an OTDR Test .....................................328 Step 4: Select the Correct ID and Fiber End if Necessary ...............................................................328 Step 5: Do OTDR Tests on End 1 of the Link ...........329 Step 6: Do OTDR Tests on End 2 of the Link ...........329 Step 7: Add Results from a Loss/Length Test ..........330 Step 8: Monitor the Status of Your Project ............333 How to Change Settings as You Use a Project ..............333 To Change the ID .....................................................333 To Change the Tests in a Project .............................335 To Save Results in a Different or New Project ........337 How to Make ID Sets ......................................................337 About Next ID Sets ...................................................339 Import an ID Set into a Project ................................340 Delete an Imported ID Set .......................................341 How to Manage Projects ................................................341 View Results in a Project ..........................................341 Rename a Project .....................................................341 Copy a Project to Make a New Project ....................341 ix Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Delete a Project ........................................................ 342 Manage Projects on a Flash Drive ........................... 342 Copy Project Settings to Other Testers ................... 343 Chapter 15 Custom Media and Test Limits How to Make a Custom Twisted Pair Cable Type ........ 345 How to Change the NVP ................................................ 346 How to Set the NVP to a Specified Value ............... 346 How to Find a Cable's Actual NVP .......................... 347 How to Reset the NVP to the Default Value .......... 348 How to Make a Custom Fiber Type ............................... 348 About the Index of Refraction ...................................... 351 How to Make a Custom Fiber Test Limit ....................... 352 Select a Custom Fiber Type or a Custom Limit ....... 355 Edit an Existing Custom Fiber Type or Test Limit ... 356 Delete a Custom Fiber Type or Test Limit .............. 356 Chapter 16 Maintenance Maintenance ................................................................... 357 Verify Operation ............................................................ 358 Clean the Tester ............................................................. 358 See Information About the Tester ................................ 358 Update the Software ..................................................... 360 Extend the Life of the Battery ....................................... 364 Store the Tester .............................................................. 364 Remove the Battery ....................................................... 364 Calibration ...................................................................... 365 If the Tester Does Not Operate as Usual ....................... 365 Clean the DI-1000 Video Probe ..................................... 367 Options and Accessories ................................................ 367 x Contents Chapter 17 Specifications Environmental and Regulatory Specifications ..............369 DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer Module Specifications ..........370 Tests and Frequencies Supported ............................370 Times for a Full, 2-Way Autotest .............................370 Standard Link Interface Adapters ...........................371 Twisted Pair LAN Cable Types Tested ......................371 Summary of Performance Specifications .......................372 Length .......................................................................372 Propagation Delay ...................................................373 Delay Skew ...............................................................373 DC Loop Resistance ..................................................373 Input Protection .......................................................374 Measurement Accuracy ............................................374 HDTDX Analyzer Specifications for Cables <100 m (328 ft) .............................................378 HDTDR Analyzer Specifications for Cables <100 m (328 ft) .............................................378 Characteristic Impedance .........................................378 CertiFiber Pro OLTS Module Specifications ...................379 CertiFiber Pro Power Meter Specifications .............379 CertiFiber Pro OLTS Loss/Length Specifications ......380 OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications ..................382 Visual Fault Locator .................................................388 DI-1000 Video Probe ................................................388 Power ...............................................................................389 Traceable Calibration Period ..........................................389 Certifications and Compliance .......................................389 Internal Memory for Test Results ...................................390 xi Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook USB Flash Drive ............................................................... 390 Serial Interfaces .............................................................. 390 RJ45 Connector ............................................................... 390 Headset Jack ................................................................... 391 Display ............................................................................. 391 Weights ........................................................................... 391 Dimensions ..................................................................... 391 Regulatory Information ................................................. 392 Appendix A OTDR Tests on Long Fiber Links Make a Custom Fiber Type, If Necessary ....................... 393 Use a Launch Cord of the Correct Type ........................ 393 Use a Launch Cord of the Correct Length .................... 394 Use a Launch Cord that Has the Correct Connectors ... 394 Use the Correct Test Limit .............................................. 395 Appendix B Reference Method Names Appendix C Reference Methods for Fiber Cabling Introduction .................................................................... 399 1 Jumper Reference ....................................................... 400 2 Jumper Reference ....................................................... 402 3 Jumper Reference ....................................................... 404 Modified 1 Jumper Reference ....................................... 406 xii List of Figures Figure Page 1. Versiv Main Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs............... 10 2. Versiv Remote Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs .......... 12 3. LEDs Show the Remote’s Battery Status........................ 15 4. Connections to See the Status of the Remote’s Battery............................................................. 16 5. How to Zoom the Screen................................................ 18 6. The HOME Screen with No Module Attached .............. 20 7. The Keyboards for Text Entry ........................................ 23 8. How to Install a Strap and Use the Hand Strap ............ 28 9. How to Remove and Install a Module ........................... 29 10. Equipment for the Twisted Pair Certification Tutorial. 31 11. Examples of Twisted Pair Autotest Results Screens ...... 35 12. Equipment for the Fiber Certification Tutorial............. 37 13. Connections for Smart Remote Mode (1 Jumper Method, Multimode Fiber) ........................... 41 14. Examples of Fiber Autotest Results Screens .................. 44 15. Equipment for the OTDR Tutorial ................................. 45 16. Connections for Launch + Tail Compensation .............. 49 17. OTDR Connected with Launch and Tail Cords .............. 50 18. Examples of the EventMap, TABLE, and TRACE Screens................................................................. 51 19. FIX LATER, TEST AGAIN, and TEST Buttons and the TEST Key ............................................................ 53 20. Main DSX Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs ............... 60 21. Remote DSX Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs........... 62 xiii Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 22. The Home Screen for DSX CableAnalyzer ......................64 23. How to Attach and Remove Link Interface Adapters....68 24. How to Prevent Damage to the Permanent Link Adapter Cables .....................................69 25. Reference Connections for Twisted Pair Cable ..............71 26. Outlet Configurations .....................................................74 27. Equipment for Autotests on Twisted Pair Cable............75 28. Permanent Link Connections ..........................................76 29. Channel Connections.......................................................77 30. PASS* and FAIL* Results..................................................79 31. WIRE MAP Tab .................................................................80 32. Wire Map Examples: Open Wire and Open Shield ........81 33. Wire Map Examples: Short and Split Pair.......................82 34. Wire Map Examples: Reversed Pair and Crossed Pairs...83 35. PERFORMANCE Tab .........................................................84 36. Length Results..................................................................87 37. Resistance Results ............................................................89 38. Tabular Results Screen for a Frequency-Domain Test ...91 39. Plot Screen for a Frequency-Domain Test ......................92 40. Insertion Loss is a Decrease in Signal Strength ..............94 41. Insertion Loss Plot ............................................................95 42. Sources of Return Loss.....................................................97 43. Return Loss Plot ...............................................................97 44. Impedance Results ...........................................................98 45. Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) ..............................................99 46. NEXT Plot .........................................................................100 47. PS NEXT Plot.....................................................................101 48. Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Near End (ACR-N)........102 49. ACR-N Plot........................................................................103 xiv List of Figures 50. PS ACR-N Plot .................................................................. 104 51. Far-End Crosstalk (FEXT)................................................. 105 52. ACR-F Plot........................................................................ 107 53. PS ACR-F Plot................................................................... 108 54. CMRL Plot ........................................................................ 109 55. Common-Mode Voltage Converts to Differential-Mode Voltage in an RJ45 Connector ........ 111 56. CDNEXT Plot.................................................................... 111 57. The Effects of EMI on Balanced and Unbalanced Twisted Pairs .............................................. 113 58. TCL Plot............................................................................ 114 59. ELTCTL Plot...................................................................... 115 60. How the 3 dB Rule Shows on Plots ................................ 117 7. Permanent Link Connections Through a PoE Device.... 127 8. Channel Connections Through a PoE Device ................ 128 9. AC Wire Map Examples: Open and Short...................... 129 10. AC Wire Map Examples: ................................................. 130 11. HDTDR Plot...................................................................... 136 12. Typical Faults Shown on HDTDR Plots ........................... 138 13. HDTDX Plot ..................................................................... 140 14. Typical Faults Shown on HDTDX Plots........................... 142 15. How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR or HDTDX Plot.................................................... 144 16. Examples of Clean and Dirty Fiber Endfaces................. 147 17. Equipment to Clean and Inspect Fiber Endfaces .......... 149 18. How to Use the IBC OneClick Cleaner ........................... 151 19. Main CertiFiber Pro Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs (CFP-QUAD module shown) ........................................... 156 20. Remote CertiFiber Pro Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs (CFP-QUAD module shown) ........................... 158 xv Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 21. How to Remove and Install the Connector Adapters....161 22. The Home Screen for CertiFiber Pro Modules................162 23. How to Prevent Damage to the EF-TRC Fiber Cables ....169 24. Screen to Set the Number of Connectors, Splices, and Jumpers ........................................................175 25. How to Count the Numbers of Connectors, Splices, and Jumpers ........................................................177 26. Equipment for Autotests in Smart Remote Mode .........179 27. Connections for Smart Remote Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) ........................182 28. Result for Smart Remote Mode (Unsaved Bi-Directional Results Shown).........................184 29. Detailed Result for Smart Remote Mode (Unsaved Bi-Directional Results Shown).........................186 30. Unsaved and Saved Result for Smart Remote Mode .....189 31. Equipment for Autotests in Loopback Mode.................191 32. Connections for Loopback Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) ........................193 33. Result for Loopback Mode ..............................................196 34. Equipment for Autotests in Far End Source Mode ........199 35. Connections for Far End Source Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) ........................202 36. Result for Far End Source Mode .....................................205 37. Equipment for Power Meter Measurements .................210 38. Connections to Monitor Power and Loss .......................211 39. Power Meter Measurements and Controls ....................212 40. Light Source Controls for the Main Tester .....................215 41. Main Versiv Unit with OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module (OptiFiber Pro Quad module shown) .............................218 42. The HOME Screen for OptiFiber Pro Modules ...............220 43. Connections for Launch Only Compensation.................229 xvi List of Figures 44. Connections for Launch + Tail Compensation .............. 230 45. Connections for Launch + Fiber + Tail Compensation.. 231 46. SET LAUNCH COMP Screen............................................. 232 47. How to Retract the Launch/Tail Cord ............................ 235 48. The OTDR Port Connection Quality Gauge and Progress Screen........................................................ 237 49. Equipment for OTDR Tests ............................................. 238 50. OTDR Connected with a Launch Cord ........................... 239 51. OTDR Connected with Launch and Tail Cords .............. 240 52. OTDR Connected to a Spool of Fiber............................. 241 53. EventMap Example 1 ...................................................... 243 54. EventMap Example 2 ...................................................... 246 55. Event Table...................................................................... 248 56. OVERALL FIBER RESULT Screen ...................................... 255 57. EVENT DETAILS Screen ................................................... 257 58. OTDR Trace...................................................................... 260 59. How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the ODTR Trace.......................................................... 263 60. Equipment for FaultMap Tests....................................... 276 61. FaultMap Test Connections............................................ 277 62. FaultMap Screen ............................................................. 278 63. Equipment for the FiberInspector Test.......................... 282 64. FiberInspector Image with Measurement Scales (fiber with 50 µm core shown)....................................... 284 65. Equipment for Visual Fault Locator Tests...................... 288 66. How to Use the Visual Fault Locator ............................. 290 67. RESULTS Screen ............................................................... 300 68. How to Connect the Tester to a PC ............................... 307 69. PROJECT Screen............................................................... 310 70. CHANGE CABLE IDs Screen............................................. 317 xvii Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 71. CABLE ID SETUP Screen (after you enter the first and last IDs) ............................318 72. CHANGE ID Screen for Tests on Twisted Pair and Single Fibers..............................................................321 73. CHANGE TEST Screen.......................................................324 74. Equipment for the OTDR Project Tutorial......................326 75. Equipment for the Loss/Length Project Tutorial............327 76. CHANGE ID Screen for Smart Remote Mode .................331 77. Copper, OTDR, and Loss/Length Saved in a Project.......332 78. VERSION INFORMATION Screen for the Main Unit .......359 79. How to Connect the Tester to a PC ................................361 80. How to Connect Units Together to Update the Software ....................................................................363 81. How to Remove the Battery ...........................................365 82. Typical Dead Zone Performance of Multimode OptiFiber Pro Modules ....................................................386 83. Typical Dead Zone Performance of Singlemode OptiFiber Pro Modules ....................................................387 xviii List of Tables Table Page 1. International Electrical Symbols..................................... 2 2. Settings for Twisted Pair Tests ....................................... 72 3. dB Rules for TIA Permanent Link Test Limits ................ 119 4. dB Rules for TIA Channel Test Limits ............................. 120 5. dB Rules for ISO Permanent Link Test Limits ................ 120 6. dB Rules for ISO Channel Test Limits ............................. 121 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures .............................. 131 8. Settings for Fiber Tests ................................................... 172 9. Settings for OTDR Tests .................................................. 223 10. Settings for Test Limits that Use Length to Calculate a Loss Limit ................................................. 226 11. Event Types .................................................................... 250 12. Manual OTDR Settings ................................................... 271 13. Causes of Failures in Fiber Links..................................... 291 14. Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures .............................. 292 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures ......................................... 294 16. Settings for Custom Fiber Types .................................... 349 17. Custom Test Limit Settings for Loss/Length Tests ........ 353 18. Custom Test Limit Settings for OTDR Tests ................... 354 19. Possible Solutions for Unusual Behavior ..................... 366 20. Level V Accuracy Performance Parameters per IEC Guidelines........................................................... 375 A-1. Minimum Length of a Launch Cord............................... 394 xix Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook xx Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Overview of Features The Versiv™ main and remote units are rugged, hand-held instruments that you configure to certify, troubleshoot, and document copper and fiber optic cabling. The Versiv platform includes these features: Operates with DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer™ modules to certify twisted pair cabling. See Chapter 3. Operates with CertiFiber® Pro Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) modules to measure optical power loss and length on dualfiber, multimode and singlemode cabling. See Chapter 7. Operates with OptiFiber® Pro OTDR modules to locate, identify, and measure reflective and loss events in multimode and singlemode fibers. See Chapter 9. Operates with OneTouch™ AT Network Assistant module to test, troubleshoot, and document network performance. See the Fluke Networks website for more information. Gives a PASS or FAIL result based on a test limit that you specify. Touchscreen lets you quickly navigate through different views of the results and see more information about cables. Lets you set up projects to specify the types of tests and the cable IDs necessary for a job and monitor the progress and status of the job. LinkWare™ software lets you upload test results to a PC and make professional-quality test reports. LinkWare Stats software makes browsable, graphical reports of cable test statistics. 1 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Safety Information Table 1 shows the international electrical symbols used on the tester or in this manual. Symbols for certifications and compliance are on page 389. : This key turns the tester on and off. Table 1. International Electrical Symbols Warning: Risk of fire, electric shock, or personal injury. Warning or Caution: Risk of damage or destruction to equipment or software. See explanations in the manuals. Do not connect this equipment to public communications networks, such as telephone systems. Warning: Class 1 (OUTPUT port) and Class 2 (VFL port) lasers. Risk of eye damage from hazardous radiation. Do not put products containing circuit boards into the garbage. Dispose of circuit boards in accordance with local regulations. For the Versiv Main Unit Warning To prevent possible fire, electric shock, or personal injury: 2 Use only ac adapters approved by Fluke Networks for use with the tester to supply power to the tester and charge the battery. Do not put the battery pack in a fire or an environment with temperatures more than 140 °F (60 °C). Do not use the tester in damp or wet environments. Do not short-circuit or disassemble the battery pack. Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Safety Information Do not use the tester if it is damaged. Inspect the tester before use. Do not open the case; no user-serviceable parts are inside. Do not modify the tester. If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment can possibly be impaired. Caution To prevent damage to the tester or cables under test and to prevent data loss: To prevent unreliable test results, connect the ac adapter or replace the battery as soon as the low battery indication appears. Keep modules attached to the Versiv units to give protection to the module connectors. Do not remove the USB flash drive while the LED on the drive flashes. Doing so can corrupt the data on the drive. You can lose a USB flash drive, cause damage to it, or accidentally erase the contents of the drive. Thus, Fluke Networks recommends that you save no more than one day of test results on a flash drive. 3 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook For DSX Modules and Twisted Pair Adapters Warning To prevent possible fire, electric shock, or personal injury: Do not connect the tester to telephony inputs, systems, or equipment, including ISDN inputs. Doing so is a misapplication of this product, which can cause damage to the tester and make a possible shock hazard for the user. Always turn on the tester before you connect it to a link. Doing so activates the tester’s input protection circuitry. Caution To prevent damage to the tester or cables under test, to prevent data loss, and to make sure your test results are as accurate as possible: 4 Do not connect the tester to an active network. Doing so causes unreliable test results, can disrupt network operations, and can cause damage to the tester. Connect to the adapters only plugs that are made for Ethernet applications, such as RJ45, ARJ45, and Cat 7 plugs. Other types of plugs, such as RJ11 (telephone) plugs, can cause permanent damage to the jacks. To make sure your test results are as accurate as possible, do the reference procedure every 30 days. See “About Link Interface Adapters” on page 67. Do not operate portable transmitting devices, such as walkie-talkies and cell phones, during a cable test. Doing so can cause errors in test results. For permanent link adapters, do not twist, pull on, pinch, crush, or make kinks in the cables. See Figure 24 on page 69. Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Safety Information For CertiFiber Pro OLTS Modules Warning: Class 1 and Class 2 Laser Products To prevent possible eye damage caused by hazardous radiation: Do not look directly into optical connectors. Some optical equipment emits invisible radiation that can cause permanent damage to your eyes. Keep the module’s OUTPUT ports covered with a dust cap or keep a test reference cord attached. The OUTPUT ports can emit radiation even when you do not do a test. Do not run any tests that activate the outputs on the tester unless a fiber is attached to the output. When you inspect fiber endfaces, use only magnification devices that have the correct filters. Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures not stated herein can possibly result in hazardous radiation exposure. Caution To prevent damage to the tester or cables under test and to prevent data loss: Do not connect the tester to an active network. Doing so causes unreliable test results, can disrupt network operations, and can cause damage to the module’s receiver. Use proper cleaning procedures to clean all fiber connectors before every use. Neglecting this step or using improper procedures can cause unreliable test results and may permanently damage the connectors. See Chapter 6. Use a video probe to periodically inspect the module’s optical connectors for scratches and other damage. 5 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To make sure your test results are as accurate as possible, do the reference procedure frequently. See “About the Reference for Fiber Tests” on page 165. Use only high-quality test reference cords that comply with the standards. See “About Test Reference Cords and Mandrels” on page 167 Connect the AC adapter or replace the battery as soon as the low battery indication appears. For OptiFiber Pro OTDR Modules Warning: Class 1 and Class 2 Laser Products To prevent possible eye damage caused by hazardous radiation: Do not look directly into optical connectors. Some optical equipment emits invisible radiation that can cause permanent damage to your eyes. Do not run any tests that activate the outputs on the tester unless a fiber is attached to the output. When you inspect fiber endfaces, use only magnification devices that have the correct filters. Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures not stated herein can possibly result in hazardous radiation exposure. Caution To prevent damage to the tester or cables under test: 6 Do not connect the OTDR port to an optical source. Doing so can cause damage to the OTDR receiver. Do not connect the tester to an active network. Doing so causes unreliable test results, can disrupt network operations, and can cause damage to the OTDR receiver. Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Safety Information Do not touch reflective surfaces (such as metal) to the end of a fiber cable connected to the OTDR when the OTDR is operating. An open fiber connector endface has about a 4% reflection. Holding a reflective surface near the connector endface can cause more than a 4% reflection, which can damage the photodetector in the OTDR. Use proper cleaning procedures to clean all fiber connectors before every use. Neglecting this step or using improper procedures can cause unreliable test results and may permanently damage the connectors. See Chapter 6. Use a video probe to periodically inspect the OTDR connectors for scratches and other damage. Read the instructions for splice machines before using the OTDR to monitor splicing procedures. The OTDR can interfere with the light injection detection techniques used by some splicers. 7 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Contact Fluke Networks www.flukenetworks.com [email protected] +1-425-446-4519 Fluke Networks PO Box 777 Everett, WA 98206-0777 USA 8 Australia: 61 (2) 8850-3333 or 61 (3) 9329 0244 Beijing: 86 (10) 6512-3435 Brazil: 11 3759 7600 Canada: 1-800-363-5853 Europe: +31-(0) 40 2675 600 Hong Kong: 852 2721-3228 Japan: 03-6714-3117 Korea: 82 2 539-6311 Singapore: +65-6799-5566 Taiwan: (886) 2-227-83199 USA: 1-800-283-5853 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Register Your Product Register Your Product Registering your product with Fluke Networks gives you access to valuable information on product updates, troubleshooting tips, and other support services. To register, fill out the online registration form on the Fluke Networks website at www.flukenetworks.com/registration. Additional Resources The Fluke Networks Knowledge Base answers common questions about Fluke Networks products and provides articles on cable testing techniques and technology. To access the Knowledge Base, log on to www.flukenetworks.com, then click SUPPORT > Knowledge Base. Supplements and Updated Manuals If necessary, Fluke Networks will put a supplement for this manual, or an updated manual, on the Fluke Networks website. To see if a supplement or updated manual is available, log on to www.flukenetworks.com, click SUPPORT > Manuals, then select a product. 9 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Versiv Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs B A J I C H G F D E GPU10.EPS Figure 1. Versiv Main Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs LCD display with touchscreen. Bay for modules, such as the DSX CableAnalyzer, CertiFiber Pro, or OptiFiber Pro modules. Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can upload test results to the PC and install software updates in the tester. 10 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Versiv Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs Type A USB port: This USB host port lets you save test results on a USB flash drive or connect a video probe to the tester. Headset jack. : Starts a test. To start a test, you can also tap TEST on the display. : Power key. : Press to go to the home screen. Connector for the ac adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. RJ45 connector: For functions available in future software releases. 11 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook B A F G E D C H GPU147.EPS Figure 2. Versiv Remote Unit Connectors, Keys, and LEDs PASS LED comes on when a test passes. TEST LED comes on during a test. FAIL LED comes on when a test fails. TALK LED comes on when the talk function is on (see ). To adjust the volume, press or the button on the headset’s microphone. 12 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted AC Adapter and Battery LOW BATTERY LED comes on when the battery is low. The LEDs also have these functions: Battery gauge (see Figure 3 on page 15) Volume indicator for the TALK function Progress indicator for software updates Bay for modules, such as the DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer, CertiFiber Pro, or OptiFiber Pro modules. : Starts a test. : Power key : Press to use the headset to speak to the person at the other end of the link. Press again to adjust the volume. To turn off the talk function, hold down . Connector for the AC adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can install software updates in the tester. Headset jack AC Adapter and Battery You can use the ac adapter (model VERSIV-ACUN) or the lithium ion battery (model VERSIV-BATTERY) to supply power to the tester. To remove the battery, see “Remove the Battery” on page 364. Charge the Battery Before you use the battery for the first time, charge the battery for about 2 hours with the tester turned off. 13 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To charge the battery Connect the ac adapter to the tester. See item in Figure 1. The LED near the ac adapter connector is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. A fully-charged battery operates for approximately 8 hours of typical use. The battery takes approximately 4 hours to fully charge when the tester is turned off. Notes You do not need to fully discharge the battery before you recharge it. The battery will not charge if its temperature is outside the range of 32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to 40 °C). The LED near the connection for the ac adapter is yellow if the battery will not charge. Check the Battery Status On a main tester The battery status icon is in the upper-left corner of the screen: Battery is full. Battery is approximately half full. If the ac adapter is not connected, the red bar shows that the battery is very low. Connect the ac adapter to charge the battery and make sure the tester continues to operate. The red bar also shows if the ac adapter is connected, but the battery is not installed. On a remote The LEDs show the battery status at the end of the power-up sequence, as shown in Figure 3. 14 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted AC Adapter and Battery 84 % - 100 % 67 % - 83 % 51 % - 66 % 34 % - 50 % 18 % - 33 % 0 % - 17 % GPU102.EPS Figure 3. LEDs Show the Remote’s Battery Status To see more information about the battery status 1 If you have main and remote testers with DSX CableAnalyzer or CertiFiber Pro modules, make the connections shown in Figure 4 and turn on both testers. 2 For OLTS modules, select a fiber loss/length test type. 3 Make sure the connection icon shows at the top of the screen ( ). 4 Tap TOOLS, then tap Battery Status. When the ac adapter is not connected, the screen shows the Time Remaining, which is the approximate battery life at the present rate of use. 15 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook DSX CableAnalyzer modules with permanent link and channel adapters DSX CableAnalyzer modules with two channel adapters and a patch cord CertiFiber Pro modules and two fiber patch cords GPU148.EPS Figure 4. Connections to See the Status of the Remote’s Battery How to Use the Touchscreen The touchscreen lets you use fingertip gestures to control the tester. You can also operate the touchscreen with a stylus that is made for projected capacitance touchscreens. 16 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted How to Use the Touchscreen Caution For correct operation and to prevent damage to the touchscreen: Touch the screen only with your fingers or with a stylus that is made for projected capacitance touchscreens. Do not use too much force. Do not touch the screen with sharp objects. Note The touchscreen will not respond if you tap it with your fingernail or an incorrect type of stylus or if you wear non-conductive gloves. To use the touchscreen To select an item on the screen, tap the item lightly with your fingertip. To scroll a screen, lightly touch the screen then move your fingertip in the direction you want the screen to move. On screens that show a plot, trace, or FiberInspector image, use the pinch and reverse-pinch gestures to change the magnification on the screen. See Figure 5. When you zoom a trace or plot horizontal and vertical zoom controls show on the screen. These controls let you change the magnification on the distance and decibels scales independently. You can zoom in to a maximum magnification factor of 128:1. On screens that show a plot, trace, or FiberInspector image, you can drag some items, such as the measurement cursor on a plot or trace or the image on a FiberInspector screen. To clean the touchscreen, turn off the tester, then use a soft, lintfree cloth that is moist with a mild detergent. Caution When you clean the touchscreen, do not let liquid get under the plastic around the touchscreen. 17 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To zoom in, use the reversepinch gesture or the horizontal and vertical zoom controls. To move the image, drag it in any direction. To zoom out, use the pinch gesture or the horizontal and vertical zoom controls. To quickly go back to 1:1 magnification, double-tap the screen. HEJ45.EPS Figure 5. How to Zoom the Screen 18 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted The HOME Screen The HOME Screen The HOME screen (Figure 6) shows important test settings. Before you do a test, make sure these settings are correct. For a home screen with a DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer module installed, see Figure 22 on page 64. For a home screen with a CertiFiber Pro module installed, see Figure 22 on page 162. For a home screen with an OptiFiber Pro module installed, see Figure 42 on page 220. 19 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook K A B C J D E F G H I GPU98.EPS Figure 6. The HOME Screen with No Module Attached PROJECT: The project contains the settings for a job and helps you monitor the status of a job. When you save test results, the tester puts them in the project. Tap the PROJECT panel to edit the project settings, select a different project, or make a new project. Shows a summary of the test results in the project: : The number of tests that passed. : The number of tests that failed. 20 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted The HOME Screen The number of results from tests on twisted pair cable that have measurements within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The test setup panel shows the settings the tester will use when you tap TEST or press . To change these settings, tap the panel, select the test on the CHANGE TEST screen, tap EDIT, select different settings on the TEST SETUP screen, then tap SAVE. Note You can set up tests for any module that the tester can use, even when no module is attached. For copper test setups, icons show the status of the Store Plot Data and AC Wire Map settings. See Table 2 on page 72. Next ID: The Next ID panel shows the ID that the tester gives to the next test results you save. Tap Next ID to do these tasks: Enter an ID, select a different ID in the ID set, select a different set of IDs, or make a new set. The tester adds the IDs and ID sets you make to the project that shows on the home screen. Turn Auto Save on or off. Select End 1 or End 2 for OTDR and FiberInspector tests and loss/length tests in Far End Source mode. Enter a name for End 1 and End 2. Operator: The name of the person who does the job. You can enter a maximum of 20 operator names. TOOLS: The TOOLS menu lets you set up the compensation function for the launch/tail cords, use tools such as the real-time trace and the FiberInspector test, see the status of the tester, and set user preferences such as the language and the display brightness. 21 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook RESULTS: Tap RESULTS to see and manage the results that are saved in the tester. TEST: Tap TEST to do the test shown in the test setup panel. The percentage of the tests in the project that are completed. The tester uses the number of available IDs and, for fiber tests, the tests you selected on the CABLE ID SETUP screen to calculate this percentage. See Figure 71 on page 318. % Tested does not show if your project contains only a Next ID list. See “About Next ID Sets” on page 339 for more information about the Next ID list. The type of module attached to the tester. If no module is attached, this screen shows HOME. How to Enter Text When you tap a panel to enter text, a keyboard shows on the bottom half of the display (Figure 7). 22 To enter characters, tap the characters on the keyboard. To change the case of the letters, tap To delete characters, tap To move the cursor into a group of characters, tap on the group. To select a group of characters, double-tap on the group. To enter accented letters, tap , then tap the letters on the keyboard. To enter non-accented letters, tap again. To save the text, tap DONE. . . Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Set User Preferences Standard characters Accented characters GPU28.EPS Figure 7. The Keyboards for Text Entry Set User Preferences User preferences are settings you usually change when you use the tester for the first time. Note You can use LinkWare software to make a file that contains settings for user preferences, then you can install the settings in one or more testers. You can also export the settings from the tester to LinkWare. See “Import User Preferences from a File” on page 26. Also see the online help in LinkWare. Language On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, tap Language, then tap a language. 23 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Date and Time Settings and Formats Note If you remove the battery and do not connect the ac adapter, the clock keeps the current date and time for a minimum of 24 hours. 1 2 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, tap Date/Time, then tap the setting you want to change: To set the date, tap Date. Tap or to select a month and year for the calendar, then tap the correct date on the calendar. Tap DONE to save your setting. To set the time, tap Time. Tap or to increase or decrease the setting for hours, minutes, and seconds. Tap DONE to save your settings. To set the date format, tap Date Format, then tap a format for the day (DD), month (MM), and year (YYYY). To set the time format to 12-hour clock or a 24-hour clock, tap the Time Format control to make 12 hr or 24 hr show. To go back to the home screen from the Date/Time screen, tap two times or press . Number Format The tester can show decimal fractions with a decimal point (0.00) or a comma (0,00). 24 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon. 2 In the Number panel, tap the control to show 0.0 or 0,0. 3 To go back to the home screen, tap or press . Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Set User Preferences Units for Length Measurements 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon. 2 In the Length panel, tap the control to show ft or m. 3 To go back to the home screen, tap or press . Power-Down and Backlight Timeout Periods To increase the battery life, the tester can turn off the backlight and automatically turn off the tester when you do not press any keys for a specified period. When the backlight timeout period ends, the brightness of the backlight decreases. After one more timeout period, the display turns off. Touch the display to turn it on. 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon. 2 Tap Timeout Period, then tap Backlight or Power Down. 3 Tap a time. To always keep the backlight or tester on, tap Disabled. 4 To go back to the home screen, tap . two times or press The Versiv remote tester turns off after 60 minutes of inactivity. You cannot change this setting. Audible Tone You can enable or disable the tones the tester makes during tests and when you press keys. If you connect a remote tester to the main tester through DSX or CertiFiber Pro modules, the remote uses the main tester’s setting. 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon. 2 In the Audible Tone panel, tap the control to show On or Off. 3 To go back to the home screen, tap or press . 25 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Power Line Frequency Set the power line frequency to the power frequency in the area where you will use the tester. This setting decreases the effects of ac noise on the circuits in the tester. 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon. 2 In the Power Line Frequency panel, tap the control to show 50 Hz or 60 Hz. 3 To go back to the home screen, tap or press . Display Brightness 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Display. 2 On the brightness scale, tap or slide the yellow bar to adjust the brightness, then tap DONE. Note When you increase the display brightness, the battery life decreases. 3 To go back to the home screen, tap or press . Import User Preferences from a File You can use LinkWare software to make a file that contains settings for user preferences, then you can import the file into the tester. You can also export settings from a tester to the PC. See the online help in LinkWare for instructions. 26 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted Overview of Memory Functions Overview of Memory Functions Typical capacity for the memory in a main Versiv unit depends on the type of tests you save: Twisted pair tests: You can save approximately 12,700 Cat 6A Autotest results, with plot data included. Loss/length tests: You can save approximately 30,000 loss/ length fiber test results. OTDR tests: You can save approximately 2000 OTDR tests on fiber links with an average length of 2 km, and up to 5000 tests for lengths less than 2 km. The capacity available for test results depends on the space used by the software and custom test limits in the tester. The number of test results you can save decreases if you save more tests in each record, or if you save tests that use more memory. For example, records that include OTDR tests and images from the video probe use more memory than records that include OTDR tests and FaultMap tests. To see the memory status On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Memory Status. To make more memory available, you can export results to a USB flash drive, then delete the results in the tester. See “Manage Results on a Flash Drive”on page 305. 27 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Install a Strap Two types of straps are available for the tester: a hand strap that helps you hold the tester, and a carrying strap that lets you carry and hang the tester. If one of the types is not included with your tester, you can purchase it from an authorized Fluke Networks distributor. Figure 8 shows how to install a strap and how to use the hand strap. GPU43.EPS Figure 8. How to Install a Strap and Use the Hand Strap How to Remove or Install a Module Figure 9 shows how to remove and install the module. Note It is not necessary to turn off the tester before you remove or install a module. 28 Chapter 1: Get Acquainted How to Remove or Install a Module Removal B A A Caution Installation To prevent damage to the case, push the latches down () before you turn them (). A B C D C D GPU20.EPS Figure 9. How to Remove and Install a Module 29 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook About LinkWare and LinkWare Stats Software The LinkWare Cable Test Management software included with your tester lets you upload test records to a PC, organize and examine test results, print professional-quality test reports, and do software updates and other maintenance procedures on your tester. Updates to LinkWare software are available on the Fluke Networks website. The LinkWare Stats Statistical Report software that is included with LinkWare software provides statistical analysis of cable test reports and generates browsable, graphical reports. For instructions about LinkWare and LinkWare Stats software, see the guides for getting started and the online help available under Help on the LinkWare and LinkWare Stats menus. 30 Chapter 2: Get Started Warning Before you use the tester, read the safety information that starts on page 2. Tutorial: Certify Twisted Pair Cabling The tutorial in this section gives instructions on how to set up a test to certify twisted pair cabling, do the test, and save the results. Figure 15 shows the minimum equipment necessary for this tutorial. B A C Main and remote Versiv units with DSX CableAnalyzer modules installed Two channel adapters D GPU101.EPS Twisted pair cable AC adapters with line cords (optional) Figure 10. Equipment for the Twisted Pair Certification Tutorial 31 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Memory Status. The MEMORY STATUS screen shows these values: The percentage of memory available The number of test records that are saved The number of ID sets that have been downloaded to the tester from LinkWare. The memory space taken by other files, such as the databases for projects and limits. Step 2: Set Up a Twisted Pair Test 2-1 Attach DSX-5000 modules to the tester and the remote. 2-2 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2-3 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap NEW TEST. 2-4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap each setting to make these selections: Module: This is the module you will use for the test. For a test on twisted pair cable, tap DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer. Note You can select settings for any module that the tester can use. It is not necessary to install a module before you set up a test for that module. Cable Type: This is the type of cable you will test. The CABLE TYPE screen shows the last 10 types of cable that were selected. Tap the correct cable type. If you do not see the correct cable type, tap MORE, tap the name of a cable group, then tap a cable in the group. 32 NVP: Nominal velocity of propagation, which the tester uses to calculate length. For this tutorial, use the default value. The default value is defined by the selected cable type and is the typical NVP for that cable type. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Shield Test: This setting shows only when you select a shielded cable type. If you selected a shielded cable type, select On for this setting. Test Limit: The test limit specifies the limits for measurements so that the tester can give a PASS or FAIL result to the test. The TEST LIMIT screen shows the last 10 limits that were selected. If you do not see the correct test limit, tap MORE, tap the name of a group, then tap a test limit. Store Plot Data: If Store Plot Data is Off, the tester does not save plot data for frequency-domain tests or for the HDTDR/HDTDX analyzers. You can see the plots before you save the test and exit the results screen. If Store Plot Data is On, the tester saves plot data for frequency-domain tests. Make sure that Store Plot Data is On. If it is not, tap the On/ Off control. HDTDR/HDTDX: This setting lets you see results from the HDTDR™ and HDTDX™ analyzers only when a test gets a FAIL or PASS* result, or after every Autotest. The analyzer results help you locate the causes of FAIL and PASS* results. These tests are not required by any test limit. To see these results, select All Autotests. Outlet Configuration: This is the wire map for the cable. The Test Limit you select determines which Outlet Configurations you can select on the OUTLET CONFIG screen. If the correct outlet configuration does not show, tap Outlet Configuration. On the OUTLET CONFIG screen, tap the correct configuration, then tap USE SELECTED. 2-5 AC Wire Map: This setting lets you do tests on links connected through midspan PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices. For this tutorial, make sure this setting is Off. On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. For more information on settings, see “Settings for Twisted Pair Tests” on page 71. 33 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function For this tutorial, you will manually save the test results. 3-1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 3-2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the Auto Save control to make it show Off. 3-3 Tap DONE. Step 4: Do an Autotest 4-1 Attach the channel adapters to the main and remote testers. 4-2 Turn on both testers, then connect a twisted pair cable between the adapters. 4-3 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. Step 5: Look at the Results The tester shows the Autotest results in three formats (Figure 11): WIRE MAP: Shows the connections between the ends of the cable. PERFORMANCE: Shows the overall result for each test. Use this screen to quickly see which test failed. Plot and tabular results screens: Tap a test on the PERFORMANCE screen to see a table or plot of the results. If you set HDTDR/HDTDX to All Autotests, you can see the analyzers’ results on the DIAGNOSTIC tab. 34 Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Figure 11. Examples of Twisted Pair Autotest Results Screens GPU103.EPS 35 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 6: Save the Results 6-1 Tap SAVE (if the result was PASS) or FIX LATER (if the result was FAIL). 6-2 On the SAVE RESULT screen, tap the Cable ID box, use the keyboard to enter an ID for the results, then tap DONE. 6-3 Tap SAVE. Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling The tutorial in this section gives instructions on how to set up a loss/length test to certify fiber optic cabling, do the test, and save the results. Figure 15 shows the minimum equipment necessary for this tutorial. Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Memory Status. The MEMORY STATUS screen shows these values: 36 The percentage of memory available The number of test records that are saved The number of ID sets that have been downloaded to the tester from LinkWare. The memory space taken by other files, such as the databases for projects and limits. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling B C D A F E G H GPU143EPS Main and remote Versiv units with CertiFiber Pro modules installed For multimode fiber: two EF-TRC test reference cords Two singlemode adapters For multimode fiber: two test Duplex fiber link or segment Fiber cleaning supplies Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) AC adapters with line cords (optional) reference cords. For singlemode fiber: four test reference cords. Figure 12. Equipment for the Fiber Certification Tutorial 37 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 2: Set Up a Loss/Length Test 2-1 Attach CertiFiber Pro modules to the tester and the remote. 2-2 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2-3 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap NEW TEST. 2-4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap each setting to make these selections: Module: This is the module you will use for the test. For a loss/length test on fiber cable, tap the CertiFiber Pro module you will use. Note You can select settings for any module that the tester can use. It is not necessary to install a module before you set up a test for that module. Test Type: Use Smart Remote mode for tests on duplex fibers. Use Loopback and Far End Source mode for tests on single fibers. For this tutorial, select Smart Remote mode. Bi-Directional: This setting lets you do fiber tests in both directions. For this tutorial, set it to On. Fiber Type: This is the type of fiber you will test. The FIBER TYPE screen shows the last 10 types of cable that were selected. Tap the correct fiber type. If you do not see the correct fiber type, tap MORE, tap the name of a fiber group, then tap a fiber in the group. 38 Fiber Type Settings: Tap this item to see the index of refraction (IR) values for the Fiber Type you selected. Test Limit: The test limit specifies the limits for measurements so that the tester can give a PASS or FAIL result to the test. The TEST LIMIT screen shows the last 10 limits that were selected. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling For this tutorial, select General Fiber Optic. If you do not see this limit on the TEST LIMIT screen, tap MORE, tap Application, then tap General Fiber Optic. 2-5 Reference Method: Select the number of jumpers you in each fiber path when you set the reference. For this tutorial, select 1 jumper. Connector Type: Select the type of connector, such as SC or LC, used in the cabling. The tester saves this setting to record the type of connector you used. This setting does not change your test results or any of the diagrams that the tester shows. If the correct type is not in the list, select General. No. of Connections/Splices: The Total Connections and Splices settings are applicable only if the selected test limit uses a calculated limit for loss. General Fiber Optic does not use a calculated limit, so it is not necessary to select these values. On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. For more information on settings, see “Settings for Loss/Length Tests on Fiber” on page 170. Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function For this tutorial, you will manually save the test results. 3-1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 3-2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the Auto Save control to make it show Off. 3-3 Tap DONE. 39 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 4: Set the Reference The reference procedure for fiber cable sets a baseline power level for loss measurements. It is important to set the reference frequently for loss/length tests. 4-1 Turn on the tester and remote and let them sit for a minimum of 5 minutes. Let them sit longer if they are above or below ambient temperature. 4-2 Clean and inspect the connectors on the tester, remote, and test reference cords. 4-3 On the home screen tap SET REF. 4-4 On the SET REFERENCE screen, tap RUN WIZARD. 4-5 Make the connections to set the reference, as shown on the screen and in Figure 13 above Reference, then tap NEXT to see the completed connections. Note When you set the reference, align the testers as shown in Figure 13 to keep the fibers as straight as possible. 40 4-6 To enter the length of the test reference cords you will add to connect to the link, tap TRC LENGTH on the SET REFERENCE screen. The length you enter does not change the test results. The tester saves the length with the results to meet TIA reporting requirements. 4-7 Tap SET REFERENCE. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling Caution Do not disconnect the outputs ( and ) after you set the reference. When you use the EF-TRCs, DO NOT use other mandrels. Test reference cord Fiber link Test reference cord Reference TRC Verification Fiber Link Test *Use the EF-TRCs only with multimode modules. GPU122.EPS Figure 13. Connections for Smart Remote Mode (1 Jumper Method, Multimode Fiber) 41 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 5: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cords You Will Add Caution If you disconnected a test reference cord from the output of the tester or remote, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 5-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the reference procedure is completed, tap NEXT. 5-2 Disconnect the test reference cords from the INPUT ports on the tester and remote, then use test reference cords and adapters to make the connections to verify the TRCs, as shown on the screen and in Figure 13 above TRC Verification. 5-3 Tap TRC VERIFICATION. The tester measures and saves the loss of the test reference cords you added. If the tester shows a warning, clean and inspect the connectors on the TRCs in the path that has too much loss, then set the reference and do the TRC verification again. 42 Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Certify Fiber Optic Cabling Step 6: Do an Autotest in Smart Remote Mode Caution If you disconnected a test reference cord from the output of the tester or remote, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 6-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the set reference or TRC verification procedure is completed, tap NEXT to see how to connect to the link under test. 6-2 Clean and inspect all the connectors. 6-3 Make the connections to do the test on the fiber link, as shown on the screen and in Figure 13 above Fiber Link Test, then tap DONE. 6-4 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. 6-5 Halfway through the test, the tester tells you to switch the input and output fibers for the bi-directional test. Caution Switch the connections at both ends of the patch panel or fiber under test, not at the tester's and remote’s ports. If you disconnect a test reference cord from an output port on the tester or remote, the reference value will be unreliable. 43 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 7: Look at the Results The tester shows the Autotest results in two formats (Figure 14): The first screen shows the worst-case results for each fiber. To see more details about a fiber, tap a result window. Figure 14. Examples of Fiber Autotest Results Screens GPU144.EPS Step 8: Save the Results 44 8-1 Tap SAVE (if the result was PASS) or FIX LATER (if the result was FAIL). 8-2 On the SAVE RESULT screen, tap the Cable ID box, use the keyboard to enter an ID for the results, then tap DONE. 8-3 Tap SAVE. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test The tutorial in this section gives instructions on how to set up for a bi-directional OTDR test, set up the launch compensation function, make connections, do a test, and save the results. Figure 15 shows the equipment necessary for this tutorial. D E A B C GPU52.EPS Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Fiber cleaning supplies Fiber link or segment Launch and tail cords (match the AC adapter with line cord Pro module installed fiber to be tested) (optional) Figure 15. Equipment for the OTDR Tutorial 45 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: See How Much Memory is Available On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Memory Status. The MEMORY STATUS screen shows these values: The percentage of memory available The number of test records that are saved The number of ID sets that have been downloaded to the tester from LinkWare. The memory space taken by other files, such as the databases for projects and limits. Step 2: Set Up an OTDR Test 2-1 Attach an OptiFiber Pro module to the tester. 2-2 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2-3 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap NEW TEST. 2-4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap each setting to make these selections: Module: This is the module you will use for the test. For an OTDR test, tap the OFP (OptiFiber Pro) module you will use. Note You can select settings for any module that the tester can use. It is not necessary to install a module before you set up a test for that module. 46 Test Type: Make sure the Test Type is Auto OTDR. If it is not, tap Test Type then tap Auto OTDR. Launch Compensation: When this setting is On, the tester removes the losses, lengths, and attenuation coefficients of the launch and tail cords from overall OTDR results. For this tutorial, set it to On. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test Wavelengths: You can do tests at one or all of the wavelengths that the fiber type supports. For this tutorial, select all available wavelengths. Fiber Type: This is the type of fiber you will test. The FIBER TYPE screen shows the last 10 types of fiber that were selected. If you do not see the necessary fiber type, tap MORE, tap the name of a Fiber Group, then tap a fiber in the group. Fiber Type Settings: Tap this item to see the index of refraction (IR) and Backscatter values for the Fiber Type you selected. Test Limit: The test limit specifies the limits for measurements so that the tester can give a PASS or FAIL result to the test. The TEST LIMIT screen shows the last 10 limits that were selected. For this tutorial, select General Fiber. If you do not see this limit on the TEST LIMIT screen, tap MORE, tap Miscellaneous, then tap General Fiber. 2-5 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. For more information on settings, see “Settings for OTDR Tests” on page 222. Step 3: Turn Off the Auto Save Function For this tutorial, you will manually save the test results. 3-1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 3-2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the Auto Save control to make it show Off. 3-3 Stay on this screen to do the next step. 47 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 4: Give Names to the Ends of the Fiber Names let you identify the locations of the fiber ends. For example, End 1 is in the telecommunications closet and End 2 is in a work area. 4-1 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End: panel. 4-2 On the EDIT END NAME screen, tap the End 1 box, then use the keyboard to enter a name. 4-3 Tap the End 2 box, use the keyboard to enter a name, then tap DONE. 4-4 On the CHANGE ID screen, make sure that End 1 and the name you gave End 1 shows. If End 2 shows, tap the End 1/End 2 control in the upper-right corner of the screen to make End 1 show. 4-5 Tap DONE. Step 5: Set Up Launch Fiber Compensation For this tutorial, you will use launch and tail cords. 48 5-1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Set Launch Compensation. 5-2 On the SET LAUNCH METHOD screen tap Launch + Tail. 5-3 Clean and inspect the OTDR port and the launch/tail cord connectors. 5-4 Make the connections shown in Figure 16. 5-5 Tap SET. 5-6 When the SET LAUNCH COMP screen shows, select the event that is the end of the launch cord and the start of the tail cord. When you do Launch + Tail compensation, the end of the launch cord and the start of the tail cord are the same event. 5-7 Tap SAVE. Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test After you do a test, you can enter the ID for a test you saved before. This lets you replace results or add different results to a test you saved before. Adapter Tail cord Launch cord Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module Figure 16. Connections for Launch + Tail Compensation GPU27.EPS Step 6: Do an OTDR Test from End 1 6-1 Clean all fiber connectors. 6-2 Connect the launch cord to the tester and to the cabling, as shown in Figure 17. 6-3 Tap TEST or press . 49 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Fiber link or segment Tail cord Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module Launch cord Figure 17. OTDR Connected with Launch and Tail Cords 50 GPU04.EPS Chapter 2: Get Started Tutorial: Do a Bi-Directional OTDR Test Step 7: Look at the Results from End 1 The tester shows the OTDR results in three formats (Figure 18): EventMap: Shows a diagram of the events on the fiber, the fiber length, and the overall loss of the fiber. Use this screen to quickly locate connectors and faults on the fiber. To see details for an event, tap the event on the map, then tap the information window for the event. TABLE: Shows a table of the events on the fiber. Use this screen to quickly see measurements for all events and see the types of events that are on the fiber. The table includes the distance to the event, the loss of the event, the size of the reflection from the event, the type of the event, and a pass/fail status. To see details for an event, tap the event in the table. TRACE: Shows the OTDR trace. Use this screen to examine events and make other measurements. GPU26.EPS Figure 18. Examples of the EventMap, TABLE, and TRACE Screens 51 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 8: Save the Results from End 1 8-1 Tap SAVE (if the result was PASS) or FIX LATER (if the result was FAIL). 8-2 On the SAVE RESULT screen, tap the Cable ID box, use the keyboard to enter an ID for the results, then tap DONE. 8-3 Tap SAVE. Step 9: Do the OTDR Test from End 2 9-1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 9-2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End 1/End 2 panel control to make End 2 show. 9-3 Tap DONE. 9-4 Connect the launch and tail cords to opposite ends of the cabling. 9-5 Tap TEST or press . Step 10: Save the Results from End 2 10-1 Tap SAVE (if the result was PASS) or FIX LATER (if the result was FAIL). 10-2 On the SAVE RESULT screen, tap the Cable ID box, use the keyboard to enter the same ID for the results, then tap DONE. 10-3 Tap SAVE. Step 11: Look at the Saved Results 11-1 On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. 11-2 On the RESULTS screen, tap the ID for the results you saved, then tap OTDR End 1 or OTDR End 2 to see the results. For more information on how to use the OTDR, see Chapter 9. 52 Chapter 2: Get Started Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. Note To change the Auto Save setting, tap the Next ID panel on the home screen. A B C D E F G GPU40.EPS Figure 19. FIX LATER, TEST AGAIN, and TEST Buttons and the TEST Key SAVE (yellow), TEST (gray): These buttons show if the test passed and Auto Save is off. When you tap SAVE, you can save the results with an ID that you make or select. When you tap TEST, you can select to save the results or do the test again and not save the results. UNSAVED RESULT: This button shows if Auto Save is off and you go to the home screen when a test is completed. Tap this button to see the result. 53 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook FIX LATER: This button shows if the test failed and Auto Save is off. Tap FIX LATER to save the results with an ID that you make or select. TEST AGAIN: This button shows if the test failed. Tap this button to do the test again for the same ID. If Auto Save is on, the tester saves subsequent results with the same ID. If Auto Save is off, you can save the result if necessary. When you look at a saved result that failed, tap TEST AGAIN to do the test again for the same ID and with the same test settings as the saved result. Note The color of the FIX LATER and TEST AGAIN buttons (yellow or gray) depends on which button you tapped the last time you did a test that failed. TEST (yellow): This button shows if the test passed and Auto Save is on. When Auto Save is on, the tester saves results with the next available ID when the test is completed. When you tap TEST, the tester does a test for the next available ID. : The key does the same function as the TEST AGAIN and TEST buttons. To do a test when you do not see a TEST AGAIN or TEST button, press . Options for Cable IDs When you save the test results for a cable, you usually give the results the name that is the ID for the cable. There are several methods you can use to make IDs for test results: You can use the CABLE ID SETUP screen to make a set of sequential IDs. See “Tutorial: Make a Set of Sequential Cable IDs” on page 57. When Auto Save is also on, the tester automatically saves each result with the next available ID in the set. A cable ID set also lets you use IDs again so you can add different results to tests you saved before. 54 Chapter 2: Get Started Options for Cable IDs You can enter an ID each time you do a test. To do this, turn off the Auto Save function (see page 56). Each time a test is completed, tap SAVE (if the test passed) or FIX LATER (if the test failed), then enter an ID manually. You can use LinkWare software to make a set of IDs, download the set to the tester, then import it into a project. See “Import an ID Set into a Project” on page 340. After you do a test, you can enter the ID for a test you saved before. This lets you replace results or add different results to a test you saved before. If the test failed before, and you saved the results, you can select it on the RESULTS screen, then press TEST AGAIN to replace the results for that ID. Notes Cable IDs are case-sensitive. For example, the tester saves result with the names “A0” and “a0” in two different records. Cable IDs can have a maximum of 60 characters. If you delete all the ID sets in a project, the tester makes a default set that starts with 001. 55 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Automatic Increment Function for Cable IDs Each time you save a result, the tester automatically saves the result with the next ID in the set. It is not necessary for the IDs in a set to be sequential. For example, an ID set that you make with LinkWare software can have these non-sequential IDs: B-1A B-1B RFS-A RFS-B CAM1-A CAM1-B After you save results for all IDs in a set, the auto increment function does not operate. You must manually enter an ID each time you save a result, unless you select a different ID set. If you enter an ID when you save a test, and the ID is not in the sequence of the set, the tester uses that ID, then goes back to the next ID in the set. Auto Save Function The Auto Save function automatically saves results after each test. This function decreases the time necessary to do a job. To turn the Auto Save function on or off 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the On/Off control next to Auto Save. If Auto Save is on and the test passed, the tester saves the results with the next available ID in the set. 56 Chapter 2: Get Started Options for Cable IDs If Auto Save is on and the test failed: To saved the failed result before you do a test for the next ID, tap FIX LATER. To do the test again for the same ID, tap TEST AGAIN. You can also change the Auto Save setting on the SAVE RESULTS screen. You can see this screen after you run a test. Tutorial: Make a Set of Sequential Cable IDs You can make a set of sequential cable IDs to use when you save test results. When you save results, you can use the next ID in the set as the name for the results, or you can select another ID in the set. When you make an ID set, you enter the first and last IDs in the set. The tester increments the characters that are different in the first and last IDs. For example, the first and last IDs “TELECOMA1” and “TELECOM-B2” make a set with four IDs: TELECOM-A1 TELECOM-A2 TELECOM-B1 TELECOM-B2 You can make sets with up to 5000 IDs total for all sets. An ID can have a maximum of 60 characters. Accented characters and symbols, such as the asterisk, do not increment. Notes When you make an ID set, the tester saves it in the project shown on the home screen. For information on projects, see Chapter 14. 57 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To make a set of sequential IDs Example: You will do tests on four cables (A through D) in 10 rooms (01 through 10) on the first and second floors, for a total of 80 cables. 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. 2 To save the ID set in a different project, tap CHANGE PROJECT, then tap a project. 3 On the PROJECT screen, tap NEW ID SET. 4 On the CABLE ID SETUP screen, tap the First ID panel, then use the keyboard to enter the first ID in your sequential set. For this example, enter 1-01-A. 5 Tap the Last ID panel, use the keyboard to enter the last ID in your sequential set, then tap DONE. For this example, enter 2-10-D. 6 Under Select Media, tap Copper or Fiber to specify the type of tests that will use the IDs. For IDs for fiber tests: Under Fiber, select the tests that are necessary for the project. These selections let you use the % Tested value on the home screen to monitor the progress of the project. See Figure 71 on page 318. 7 To see the ID set, tap REVIEW. 8 On the CABLE ID REVIEW screen or the CABLE ID SETUP screen, tap Save. About Projects You can set up a project to specify the settings necessary for a job, to monitor the status of a job, and organize your test results. See Chapter 14. The tester saves your settings and test results in the DEFAULT project, unless you select a different project. 58 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Overview of the DSX CableAnalyzer Modules Warning Before you use the tester, read the safety information that starts on page 2. The Fluke Networks DSX CableAnalyzer™ modules attach to Versiv™ main and remote units to make rugged, hand-held testers that let you certify, troubleshoot, and document twisted pair network cabling. The testers includes these features: The modules include these features: DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer modules certify twisted pair cabling to Class FA limits (1000 MHz) in less than 15 seconds. You can save approximately 12,700 Cat 6A Autotest results, with plot data, in the tester’s internal memory. You can save more results on a removable flash drive. AxTalk software supplied with DSX-5000 modules lets you do tests for alien crosstalk. 59 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook DSX CableAnalyzer Connectors, Keys, and LEDs GPU88.EPS Figure 20. Main DSX Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs Connector for a link interface adapter RJ45 jack for communications between the main and remote testers when you do alien crosstalk measurements. See “About the AxTalk Analyzer Kit” on page 123. LCD display with touchscreen 60 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling DSX CableAnalyzer Connectors, Keys, and LEDs : Starts a test. To start a test, you can also tap TEST on the display. : Power key : Press to go to the home screen. Connector for the AC adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. RJ45 connector: For functions available in future software releases. Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can upload test results to the PC and install software updates in the tester. Type A USB port: This USB host port lets you save test results on a USB flash drive. Headset jack 61 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B C H I D G E F GPU42.EPS Figure 21. Remote DSX Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs Connector for a link interface adapter RJ45 jack for communications between the main and remote testers when you do alien crosstalk measurements. See “About the AxTalk Analyzer Kit” on page 123. PASS LED comes on when a test passes. TEST LED comes on during a test. FAIL LED comes on when a test fails. 62 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling DSX CableAnalyzer Connectors, Keys, and LEDs TALK LED comes on when the talk function is on. To adjust the volume, press or the button on the headset’s microphone. LOW BATTERY LED comes on when the battery is low. The LEDs also have these functions: Battery gauge (see Figure 3 on page 15) Volume indicator for the TALK function Progress indicator for software updates : Starts a test. : Power key : Press to use the headset to speak to the person at the other end of the link. Press again to adjust the volume. To turn off the talk function, hold down . Connector for the AC adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can upload test results to the PC. Headset jack 63 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The Home Screen for DSX CableAnalyzer The home screen (Figure 22) shows important test settings. Before you do a test, make sure these settings are correct. LM K A B C J D E F G H I GPU110.EPS Figure 22. The Home Screen for DSX CableAnalyzer PROJECT: The project contains the settings for a job and helps you monitor the status of a job. When you save test results, the tester puts them in the project. Tap the PROJECT panel to edit the project settings, select a different project, or make a new project. 64 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling The Home Screen for DSX CableAnalyzer Shows a summary of the test results in the project: The number of tests that passed. The number of tests that failed. The number of results from tests on twisted pair cable that have measurements within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The test setup panel shows the settings the tester will use when you tap TEST or press . To change these settings, tap the panel. Note You can set up tests for any module that the tester can use, even when no module is attached. Icons show the status of the Store Plot Data and AC Wire Map settings. See Table 2 on page 72. Next ID: The Next ID panel shows the ID that the tester gives to the next test results you save. Tap Next ID to do these tasks: Enter an ID, select a different ID in the ID set, select a different set of IDs, or make a new set. The tester adds the IDs and ID sets you make to the project that shows on the home screen. Turn Auto Save on or off. Operator: The name of the person who does the job. You can enter a maximum of 20 operator names. TOOLS: The TOOLS menu lets you set the reference, see the status of the tester, and set user preferences such as the language and the display brightness. RESULTS: Tap RESULTS to see and manage the results that are saved in the tester. TEST: Tap TEST to do the test shown in the test setup panel. 65 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The percentage of the tests in the project that are completed. The tester uses the number of available IDs to calculate this percentage. See Figure 71 on page 318. % Tested does not show if your project contains only a Next ID list. See “About Next ID Sets” on page 339 for more information about the Next ID list. The type of module attached to the main Versiv unit. 66 This icon shows when the tester’s link interface adapter is connected to the adapter on a Versiv remote and the remote is turned on. This icon shows when the talk function is on. See “How to Use the Talk Function” on page 122. Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Make Sure Your Tester is Ready to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Make Sure Your Tester is Ready to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling To make sure your tester meets its accuracy specifications, follow these guidelines: Keep the tester’s software current. The latest software is available on the Fluke Networks website. See “Update the Software” on page 360. Set the reference for the twisted pair adapters every 30 days. See “Set the Reference” on page 70. Make sure you select the correct cable type for the job, and that the NVP for the cable is correct. See Table 2 on page 72. Make sure you select the correct test limit for the job. See Table 2 on page 72. Make sure the cords and connectors for all test equipment and patch cords are in good condition. Make sure the battery is fully charged. Send the modules to a Fluke Networks service center every 12 months for factory calibration. About Link Interface Adapters Link interface adapters let you connect the DSX CableAnalyzer to different types of twisted pair links. Figure 23 shows how to attach and remove adapters. Caution To prevent damage to the cables on the permanent link adapters and to make sure your test results are as accurate as possible, do not twist, pull on, pinch, crush, or make kinks in the cables. See Figure 24 on page 69. 67 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook GPU109.EPS Figure 23. How to Attach and Remove Link Interface Adapters 68 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling About Link Interface Adapters 5 in (13 cm) minimum GPU108.EPS Figure 24. How to Prevent Damage to the Permanent Link Adapter Cables 69 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Set the Reference The reference procedure for twisted pair cable sets the baseline for insertion loss, ACR-F, and DC resistance measurements. Set the reference at these times: When you want to use the tester with a different remote. You can set the reference for eight different remotes. When you attach Class F/FA link interface adapters, such as the optional DSX-PLA011 TERA™ adapters. Every 30 days. This ensures maximum accuracy of test results. To set the reference 1 Turn on the tester and the remote a minimum of 1 minute before you set the reference. Note Set the reference only after the testers are at an ambient temperature between 50 °F and 104 °F (10 °C and 40 °C). 70 2 Connect the main and remote testers together as shown in Figure 25. 3 If you attached Class F/FA link interface adapters, make sure you select a Class F or FA test limit. See the documentation supplied with the adapters. 4 On the home screen, tap TOOLS, then tap Set Reference. 5 On the SET REFERENCE screen tap TEST. Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Settings for Twisted Pair Tests Permanent link adapter Channel adapter GPU89.EPS Figure 25. Reference Connections for Twisted Pair Cable Settings for Twisted Pair Tests Table 2 gives descriptions of the settings for twisted pair tests. To set up a project, which includes the settings in Table 2, cable IDs, and operator names, see Chapter 14. To set up a twisted pair test 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, select a twisted pair test to change, then tap EDIT. Or to set up a new twisted pair test, tap NEW TEST. If no module is installed, the MODULE screen shows. Tap DSX-5000. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap the panels to change settings for the test. See Table 2. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE when your test setup is completed. 5 On the CHANGE TEST screen, make sure the button next to the test is selected, then tap USE SELECTED. 71 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 2. Settings for Twisted Pair Tests Setting Description Module Select DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer. Cable Type Select a cable type that is correct for the type you will test. To see a different group of cable types, tap MORE, then tap a group. To make a custom cable type, see Chapter 15. NVP Nominal velocity of propagation. The tester uses the NVP and the propagation delay to calculate the length of the cable. The default value is defined by the selected cable type and is the typical NVP for that cable type. To enter a or different value, tap the NVP panel, then tap on the NVP screen to increase or decrease the value. To find the actual value for a cable, connect a known length of the cable to the tester, tap MEASURE on the NVP screen, then change the NVP until the measured length matches the known length. Use a cable at least 30 m (100 ft) long. When you increase the NVP value, the calculated length increases. Shield Test This setting shows only when you select a shielded cable type. When you set Shield Test to On, the wire map test includes a test for shield continuity. Test Limit Select the correct test limit for the job. To see a different group of limits, tap MORE, then tap the name of a group. Store Plot Data Off : The tester does not save plot data for frequencydomain tests or for the HDTDR/HDTDX analyzers. You can see the plots before you save the test and exit the results screen. The saved results show frequency-domain measurements in a table and do not include the HDTDR/ HDTDX plots. On : The tester saves plot data for all frequencydomain tests required by the selected test limit and for the HDTDR/HDTDX analyzers. 72 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Settings for Twisted Pair Tests Table 2. Settings for Twisted Pair Tests (continued) HDTDR/HDTDX Fail/Pass* only: The tester shows HDTDR and HDTDX analyzer results only for Autotests with PASS*, FAIL*, or FAIL results. All Autotests: The tester shows HDTDR and HDTDX analyzer results for all Autotests. To get HDTDR/HDTDX analyzer results you can also tap Tools > Diagnostics. For more information about the HDTDR and HDTDX analyzers, see Chapter 5. Outlet Configuration The Outlet Configuration specifies which wire pairs are tested and which wire numbers the wire map shows for the pairs. See Figure 26. To see the wire map for a configuration, tap Outlet Configuration, tap the configuration name on the OUTLET CONFIG screen, then tap SAMPLE. To select a configuration, tap a name on the OUTLET CONFIG screen, then tap USE SELECTED. Note The OUTLET CONFIG screen shows only the configurations that are applicable to the selected Test Limit. AC Wire Map The AC Wire Map test lets you do tests on links connected through midspan PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices. See Chapter 4. When the AC Wire Map test is on, this icon shows on the home screen: Note Always turn off the AC wire map test when you will not do tests through a PoE device. The AC wire map test increases the time for an Autotest. 73 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook T568A T568B USOC Single-Pair USOC Two-Pair Crossover 1000BASE-T Crossover Rollover 2 x Two-Pair Crossed Ethernet and M12 Two-Pair ATM/TP-PMD Straight Ethernet and M12 Two-Pair Crossed ATM/TP-PMD Crossed Token Ring CSU/DSU GPU85.EPS Figure 26. Outlet Configurations 74 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling How to Do an Autotest How to Do an Autotest When you tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester, the testers do an Autotest. The Autotest includes all the tests necessary to certify that the cabling meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in the selected test limit. Figure 27 shows the equipment for Autotests on twisted pair cable. C A D B GPU111.EPS Main and remote Versiv units with DSX CableAnalyzer modules installed For tests on permanent links: For tests on channels: two channel adapters AC adapters with line cords (optional) two permanent link adapters Figure 27. Equipment for Autotests on Twisted Pair Cable 75 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To do an Autotest on twisted pair cable 1 Attach permanent link or channel adapters to the main and remote testers. 2 Make sure that the home screen shows the correct settings for the job. To make sure that other settings are correct, tap the test setup panel, make sure the correct test is selected on the CHANGE TEST SCREEN, then tap EDIT to see more settings. Table 2 on page 72 describes the settings. 3 Connect the testers to the link as shown in Figure 28 or 29. 4 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. Horizontal cabling Optional consolidation point Patch panel Wall outlet Start permanent link Tester with permanent link adapter End permanent link Remote with permanent link adapter GPU97.EPS Figure 28. Permanent Link Connections 76 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling “Bad Patch Cord” Message Horizontal cabling Hub or switch Patch cord from hub or switch Optional consolidation point Patch panels Start channel Tester with channel adapter Wall outlet Patch cord from PC End channel Remote with channel adapter GPU96.EPS Figure 29. Channel Connections “Bad Patch Cord” Message To comply with standards for tests on channels, the tester removes the effects of the channel adapters and their connections from the test results. Before it removes these effects, the tester makes sure that the plugs on the patch cord do not have too much near-end crosstalk (NEXT). Too much NEXT is frequently caused by too much untwisted wire in the plug. If a plug is bad, the tester shows the message Bad patch cord at main or Bad patch cord at remote, and does not remove the effects of the channel adapters and their connections. The tester saves the message with the results. If you see one of these messages, replace the patch cord or install a new plug at the bad end. 77 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Twisted Pair Autotest Results The tests listed below apply to twisted pair cabling. Note Some tests are not included in some test limits. 78 Wire map Resistance Resistance unbalance Length Propagation delay Delay skew Insertion loss (attenuation) Impedance NEXT (near-end crosstalk) PS NEXT (power-sum near-end crosstalk) ACR-N (attenuation to crosstalk ratio at the near end) PS ACR-N (power-sum attenuation to crosstalk ratio) ACR-F (equal level far-end crosstalk) PS ACR-F (power-sum equal level far-end crosstalk) Return loss TCL (transverse conversion loss) CDNEXT (common-mode to differential-mode near-end crosstalk) CMRL (common-mode return loss) ELTCTL (equal level transverse conversion transfer loss) HDTDR and HDTDX analyzers (optional tests, not required by any test limit. See Chapter 5.) Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results PASS*/FAIL* Results A result shows an asterisk when measurements are in the tester’s accuracy uncertainty range (Figure 30) and the asterisk is required by the selected test limit. These results are marginal. A PASS* shows that the cable’s performance is satisfactory. If a cable must get a PASS result to agree with your requirements for quality, identify and correct the problems with the cable and do the Autotest again. Usually, a FAIL* is not a satisfactory result. Identify and correct the problems with the cable and do the Autotest again. PASS Tester’s accuracy uncertainty range PASS* Limit PASS* FAIL* FAIL GPU87.EPS Figure 30. PASS* and FAIL* Results WIRE MAP Tab The WIRE MAP tab shows the connections between the ends of the cable under test. The tester compares the connections to the selected Outlet Configuration to get a PASS or FAIL result. If the wire map test fails, you can continue or stop the Autotest. Figures 32, 33, and 34 show examples of wire map screens. For information on AC wire map screens, see Chapter 4. 79 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook D E A B C F GPU59.EPS Figure 31. WIRE MAP Tab The name of the outlet configuration used for the test. The outlet configuration is a setting on the TEST SETUP screen. The wire map of the cabling. The main tester is at the left side of the wire map. Tap to see information about wire map faults. If shows, tap it to see a message about the results, such as Bad patch cord at remote. The overall result for the Autotest. If the result shows an asterisk, See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The result for the wire map test: The wire map does not agree with the outlet configuration selected for the test. 80 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results The wire map agrees with the outlet configuration selected for the test. When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. GPU61.PNG GPU60.PNG Open Wire 4 is open 36 m from the tester and 14 m from the remote. Open Shield Shield continuity shows if you select a shielded cable type (such as S/FTP) on the TEST SETUP screen and you turn on the Shield Test. The shield in the wire map above is open 3.6 m from the tester. Figure 32. Wire Map Examples: Open Wire and Open Shield 81 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook GPU63.PNG GPU62.PNG Short Split pair Wires 1 and 2 are shorted 5.2 m from the remote. A wire in the 3,6 pair is crossed with a wire in the 4,5 pair. To see the location of the split pair, continue the test, then look at the HDTDX analyzer plot. The highest peak on the plot is typically where the split pair starts. Note Shorts not in a wire pair, for example between wires 2 and 3, always show at the near end (left side) of the wire map screen and do not show the length to the short. Figure 33. Wire Map Examples: Short and Split Pair 82 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results GPU65.PNG GPU64.PNG Reversed pair Wires 1 and 2 are crossed. Crossed pairs Pairs 1,2 and 3,6 are crossed. Figure 34. Wire Map Examples: Reversed Pair and Crossed Pairs 83 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook PERFORMANCE Tab The PERFORMANCE tab (Figure 35) shows the overall result for each test that is required by the selected test limit. C A B D E GPU86T.EPS Figure 35. PERFORMANCE Tab The test limit and cable type used for the test. To see detailed results for a test, tap the panel. The overall result for the Autotest. If the result shows an asterisk, See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The overall result for the test: The results exceed the limit. The results are within the limit. 84 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results The selected test limit does not have a limit for the test, or a dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. The results are within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The measurement shown for frequency-domain results is the worst margin. (The insertion loss plot is different. See “Insertion Loss” on page 94.) When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. Scalar Results Scalar results are measurements that do not change with frequency. These are the Length, Propagation Delay, Delay Skew and Resistance results. These results do not have plot data. Length, Propagation Delay, and Delay Skew The length results show the length, propagation delay, and delay skew of each cable pair. See Figure 36. The length shown on the PERFORMANCE screen is the length of the shortest pair. The tester uses the length of only the shortest pair to get a PASS or FAIL result for the length test. Note If the length of the shortest pair does not exceed the limit by 10 %, then the length test passes even if other pairs exceed the limit. This is the 10 % rule for length, as given in the ANSI/TIA standard. See the Fluke Networks Knowledge base for details. A 2 % to 5 % difference in measured lengths of wire pairs in a cable is normal for these reasons: Signals travel at slightly different speeds in each wire pair, but the tester uses the same NVP to calculate the length of each pair. 85 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The twist rate varies slightly among wire pairs. If you untwist and straighten all the pairs, they will have slightly different lengths. Differences between measured and actual lengths can be caused by variations in the cable’s NVP value. NVP values can vary among cable types, lots, and manufacturers. In most cases, these differences are minor and may be ignored. Propagation delay is the time taken for a test pulse to get to the end of a wire pair. The delay is measured in nanoseconds. One nanosecond is one-billionth of a second, or 0.000000001 second. Propagation delays vary slightly among pairs because of small differences in electrical characteristics and length. The tester uses the propagation delay for each pair and the NVP for the cable type to calculate the length of each pair. The tester subtracts the propagation delays for the link interface adapters, so the length results do not include the length of the cables on the permanent link adapters. Delay skews are the differences in propagation delays between the shortest delay and the delays of the other wire pairs. The shortest delay shows as “0” in the delay skew results. 86 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results E A D B C GPU68.EPS Figure 36. Length Results PROPAGATION DELAY: The time taken for a test pulse to get to the end of a wire pair. DELAY SKEW: The differences in propagation delays between the shortest delay and the delays of the other wire pairs. The shortest delay shows as “0” in the delay skew results. The tester shows a limit for propagation delay and delay skew if the measurements are required by the selected test limit. For measurements not required, the limit shows as N/A. The tester uses the propagation delay for each pair and the NVP for the cable type to calculate the length of each pair. 87 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The tester compares the length of the shortest pair to the limit, and gives the test a PASS result if the pair is not too long. The lengths of the other pairs are gray on the screen. The tester gives a PASS result if the shortest length and the longest delay skew do not exceed their limits. Resistance Resistance results show the DC loop resistance for each wire pair. The remote puts a short at the end of each pair to make the loops. A pair’s resistance depends on the quality of the contacts in the connector, the length of the pair, and its wire gauge. Figure 37 shows the resistance results screen. Resistance problems always affect other tests. For example: 88 A link that is too long has too much resistance and will fail the length test. High-resistance connections reflect signals, which causes the return loss test to fail. Use the tester’s HDTDR analyzer to see the distance to the bad connection. A difference in the resistances of the wires in a pair causes the impedances of the wires to be unbalanced, which can cause TCL tests to fail. Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results C D A B GPU69.EPS Figure 37. Resistance Results The RESISTANCE column shows the DC loop resistance for each pair. LIMIT shows only if the selected test limit includes a limit for the resistance test. The overall result for the resistance test. Some test limits do not have a limit for resistance. The tester shows an limit is available. when no The RESISTANCE UNBALANCE columns show how well the DC resistances of the wires in the pair are balanced. The VALUE is the difference in the resistances of the two wires in the pair. The tester uses the measured resistances of the two wires and the maximum unbalanced percentage specified by the 89 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook selected test limit to calculate the LIMIT for each pair. The VALUE is in a red box if it exceeds the LIMIT. Note The tester does the resistance unbalanced test only if the test is required by the selected test limit and the wire map test passed. Frequency-Domain Results Frequency-domain results are the measurements that change with frequency, such as insertion loss and crosstalk. How to Save Frequency-Domain Results as a Plot or a Table If Store Plot Data is on when you do a test, the saved results show as plots. If Store Plot Data is Off, the tester does not save plot data for frequency-domain tests or for the HDTDR/HDTDX analyzers. You can see the plots before you save the test and exit the results screen.Figures 38 and 39 show examples of the two types of screens. Also see “Store Plot Data” on page 72. See Figure 38 on page 91: The location where the tester made the measurements. To switch between results for the main and remote, tap REMOTE or MAIN (). The results are for the wire pair or pairs shown. To see the results for a different pair or pairs, tap a tab on the right side of the screen (). WORST MARGIN is the measurement that is nearest to the limit line or exceeds the limit by the largest amount. WORST VALUE is the worst measurement. The measured value. The limit specified by the selected test limit. 90 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results A I B H C D E F G GPU104.EPS Figure 38. Tabular Results Screen for a Frequency-Domain Test MARGIN is the difference between the measured value and the limit. The value is negative and is in a red box if the measurement exceeds the limit. To switch between results for the main unit and the remote, tap REMOTE or MAIN. To see the results for a different pair or pairs, tap a tab. The result for the pair. If the result shows an asterisk, see “PASS*/ FAIL* Results” on page 79. 91 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A M B C L D E F K G HI J GPU71.EPS Figure 39. Plot Screen for a Frequency-Domain Test The location of the measurements. To switch between results for the main and remote, tap REMOTE or MAIN (). Measured values for the wire pairs. The limit line (in red) for the measurement. Note If the limit line is black, the tester does not evaluate the measurement at those frequencies because a dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. 92 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results The vertical scale is the measured value in decibels. The horizontal scale is the frequency range in megahertz. To see help for the screen, tap . To switch between results for the main unit and the remote, tap REMOTE or MAIN. The margin at the cursor’s location. The margin is the difference between the measured value and the limit. The margin is negative if the pair failed. The measured value at the cursor’s location. When you first look at the plot, the cursor is at the frequency of the worst margin. To move the cursor to the worst value, tap WORST VALUE. (The insertion loss plot is different. See “Insertion Loss” on page 94.) To see the plots for pairs, tap or . To select pairs to show on the plot, touch or for one second to see the SELECT PAIRS window. Select the pairs you want to see, then tap OK. When you first look at the plot, the cursor is at the frequency of the worst margin. To move the cursor to the worst value, tap WORST VALUE (). The box at the bottom of the cursor shows the frequency at the cursor’s position. To move the cursor to other points, touch and drag the yellow circle at the top of the cursor To move the cursor in small increments, tap the yellow circle, then tap the arrow buttons that show on the plot ( or ). The overall result for the test. If you look at pairs, the result is for those pairs. If the result shows an asterisk, see “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. To zoom in and out, use the pinch, reverse-pinch, and doubletap gestures on the touchscreen. You can also use the zoom controls to change the magnification on the frequency and decibels scales independently. See Figure 5 on page 18. 93 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Insertion Loss Insertion loss is the loss of signal strength over the cabling, as shown in Figure 40. Insertion loss is caused by the DC resistance of the copper wire and connecting hardware, the impedance of the twisted pairs, and by leakage of electrical energy through the cable’s insulation. Lower values of insertion loss mean better cabling performance. At higher frequencies, signals tend to travel only near the surface of a conductor. This “skin effect”, along with the cabling’s inductance and capacitance, cause insertion loss to increase with frequency. Figure 41 shows the insertion loss plot. If the insertion loss test passed, the tester puts the cursor at the worst value. If the test failed, the cursor is at the worst margin. Insertion loss Signal input Signal output GPU81.EPS Figure 40. Insertion Loss is a Decrease in Signal Strength 94 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results GPU70.PNG Figure 41. Insertion Loss Plot 95 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Return Loss Return loss is the difference (in dB) between the power of a transmitted signal and the power of the signals reflected back. The signal reflections are caused by variations in the cable’s impedance. Figure 42 shows some common sources of reflections that create return loss. High return loss means the cabling reflects very little of the transmitted signal back to the source. High return loss is especially important for high-speed systems, such as Gigabit Ethernet. The bi-directional (full-duplex) transceivers used in these systems use directional couplers to distinguish between incoming and outgoing signals. The couplers may interpret strong reflected signals as incoming data, resulting in data errors. A return loss plot indicates how well a cable’s impedance matches its rated impedance over a range of frequencies. Figure 43 shows the return loss plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. For return loss failures, you can use the HDTDR analyzer plot to locate the cause of the failure. See “How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot” on page 143. Note Because the 3 dB rule applies to return loss results, the result is usually an . See “About dB Rules” on page 116. 96 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results Signal input Variations in materials and construction Connections Kinks and other distortions Reflected signals GPU84.EPS Figure 42. Sources of Return Loss GPU77.PNG Figure 43. Return Loss Plot 97 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Impedance Notes Most test limits do not require the impedance measurement. For these limits, the tester does not make the measurement or it shows an for the result For cables shorter than approximately 13 ft (4 m), the tester shows Cable too short for the impedance measurement. Impedance results show the approximate characteristic impedance of each wire pair. Figure 44 shows the impedance results. Characteristic impedance is the impedance a cable would have if the cable were infinitely long. Correct operation of the network depends on constant characteristic impedance throughout the system’s cables and connectors. Sudden changes in characteristic impedance, called anomalies, cause signal reflections that can cause network faults. GPU158.PNG Figure 44. Impedance Results 98 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) NEXT results show the crosstalk attenuation between wire pairs. NEXT is the difference in amplitude (in dB) between a transmitted signal and the crosstalk received on other wire pairs at the same end of the cabling. Higher NEXT values correspond to larger differences between the amplitudes of the transmitted signals and the crosstalk, which corresponds to better cabling performance. Figure 45 shows the NEXT plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the NEXT result is an an , the 4 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. Because of insertion loss, crosstalk signals occurring farther from the signal source are weaker and cause less trouble than crosstalk nearer the source (Figure 45). For this reason, the tester measures NEXT from both ends of the cabling. For NEXT failures, you can use the HDTDX analyzer plot to locate cause of the failure. See “The HDTDR Analyzer” on page 135. Signal input Crosstalk near the source Crosstalk farther from the source NEXT GPU82.EPS Figure 45. Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) 99 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook GPU71.PNG Figure 46. NEXT Plot 100 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results PS NEXT (Power Sum Near End Crosstalk) PS NEXT results show how much each wire pair is affected by the combined crosstalk from the other pairs. PS NEXT is the difference (in dB) between the test signal and the crosstalk from the other pairs received at the same end of the cabling. The tester uses the NEXT values to calculate PS NEXT. Higher PS NEXT values correspond to better cabling performance. PS NEXT results are typically a few dB lower (worse) than worstcase NEXT results. Figure 47 shows the PS NEXT plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the PS NEXT result is an an , the 4 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. GPU105.PNG Figure 47. PS NEXT Plot 101 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio at the Near End) ACR-N is like a signal-to-noise ratio. ACR-N values indicate how the amplitude of signals received from a far-end transmitter compares to the amplitude of crosstalk produced by near-end transmissions, as shown in Figure 48. The tester calculates ACR-N as the difference (in dB) between NEXT and insertion loss. Higher ACR-N values mean that received signals are much larger than crosstalk signals. Higher ACR-N values correspond to better cabling performance. Figure 49 shows the ACR-N plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the ACR-N result is an an , the 4 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. Near-end signal input Crosstalk Crosstalk and signal received from the far end Far-end signal input GPU83.EPS Figure 48. Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Near End (ACR-N) 102 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results GPU73.PNG Figure 49. ACR-N Plot PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Near End) PS ACR-N values show how the amplitude of signals received from a far-end transmitter compares to the combined amplitudes of crosstalk produced by near-end transmissions on the other wire pairs. PS ACR-N is the difference (in dB) between PS NEXT and attenuation (insertion loss). The tester uses the PS NEXT and attenuation results to calculate PS ACR-N values. Higher PS ACR-N values mean received signals are much larger than the crosstalk from all the other wire pairs. Higher PS ACR-N values correspond to better cabling performance. PS ACR-N is the difference (in dB) between each wire pair’s attenuation (insertion loss) and the combined crosstalk received 103 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook from the other pairs. The tester uses the PS NEXT and attenuation values to calculate PS ACR-N values. PS ACR-N results are typically a few dB lower (worse) than worstcase ACR-N results. Figure 50 shows the PS ACR-N plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the PS ACR-N result is an an , the 4 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. GPU106.PNG Figure 50. PS ACR-N Plot 104 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio, Far End) While NEXT is measured at the same end as the signal source, FEXT (far-end crosstalk) is measured at the far end. Because all far-end crosstalk signals travel the same distance, they experience the same amount of attenuation, as shown in Figure 51. This means that all crosstalk signals contribute equally to noise at the far end. This is different from near-end crosstalk. At the near end, crosstalk occurring closer to the source contributes more to noise than crosstalk occurring farther from the source. Signal source Crosstalk near the input Crosstalk farther from the input Far-end crosstalk GPU66.EPS Figure 51. Far-End Crosstalk (FEXT) Because of attenuation, FEXT on longer cables is less than FEXT on shorter cables of the same type. Subtracting the effects of attenuation normalizes the results for length and produces ACR-F (attenuation to crosstalk ratio, far end) values. Because ACR-F does not depend on length, it is used instead of FEXT to evaluate cable performance. Because all far-end crosstalk signals travel the same distance, they tend to add up in phase. Therefore, high ACR-F is critical when two or more wire-pairs carry signals in the same direction. 105 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 1000BASE-T carries bi-directional signals on all four wire pairs, so ACR-F is a critical parameter for 1000BASE-T certification. Like ACR-N, ACR-F represents a signal-to-noise ratio for the cabling. Higher ACR-F values mean that data signals received at the far end of the cabling are much larger than crosstalk signals received at the far end. Higher ACR-F values correspond to better cabling performance. Figure 52 shows the ACR-F plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the ACR-F result is an , the 67 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. NEXT and ACR-F performance tends to be similar in cable, but may differ greatly in connecting hardware. Some connectors achieve good NEXT performance by balancing the inductive and capacitive currents that cause crosstalk. Because these currents are 180 out of phase at the near-end of the cabling, they cancel out, which eliminates crosstalk at the near end. However, currents that cancel at the near end add up at the far end, causing far-end crosstalk and poor ACR-F performance. 106 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results GPU75.PNG Figure 52. ACR-F Plot 107 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook PS ACR-F PS ACR-F results show how much the far end of each wire pair is affected by the combined far-end crosstalk from the other pairs. PS ACR-F is the difference (in dB) between the test signal and the crosstalk from the other pairs received at the far end of the cabling. The tester uses the ACR-F values to calculate PS ACR-F. PS ACR-F results are typically a few dB lower than worst-case ACR-F results. Higher PS ACR-F values correspond to better cabling performance. Figure 53 shows the PS ACR-F plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Note If the PS ACR-F result is an , the 67 dB rule applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. GPU107.PNG Figure 53. PS ACR-F Plot 108 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results CMRL (Common-Mode Return Loss) Common-mode return loss is the difference (in dB) between the power of a common-mode signal applied to a wire pair and the power of the common-mode signal reflected back. The signal reflections are caused by variations in the cable’s impedance. At the time this manual was released, no test standards required CMRL measurements. The Autotest includes the CMRL test for troubleshooting purposes only. Figure 54 shows the CMRL plot. GPU92.PNG Figure 54. CMRL Plot 109 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook CDNEXT (Common-Mode to Differential-Mode Near-End Crosstalk) CDNEXT is the difference in amplitude (in dB) between a common-mode voltage applied to a pair and the differentialmode voltage measured on other pairs at the same end of the cabling. Higher CDNEXT values correspond to larger differences between the amplitudes of the common-mode and differentialmode voltages, which means better cabling performance. Since CDNEXT occurs mostly in the connecting hardware, the measurement indicates the quality of the design and workmanship of the jacks and connectors in the installation. At the time this manual was released, no test standards required CDNEXT measurements. The Autotest includes the CDNEXT test for troubleshooting purposes only. Figure 56 on page 111 shows the CDNEXT plot. CM to DM Conversion in Cables and Connectors Twisted pair cabling can readily pick up common-mode noise from external sources such as motors and fluorescent lights. But not much of this common-mode noise converts to differential mode in the cabling because of the construction of the pairs. The wires are very close together, and the twisting equalizes the noise signal picked up on each wire, so that very little differential voltage is generated. But conversion to differential mode readily occurs in RJ45 connectors. Typically, the wires are untwisted in the plugs. Some wires can be close to individual wires in other pairs for a significant distance, as shown in Figure 55. This spacing causes common-mode voltage on some pairs to be converted to differential-mode voltage on other pairs. The problem is most severe between pairs 4 and 3 and pairs 2 and 3. Newer Connectors Reduce Mode Conversion Newer Cat 6A connector designs compensate for the inherent unbalance of RJ45 connectors, and have much lower mode conversion than older designs. Links constructed with these connectors have better EMI rejection and also tend to have better alien crosstalk performance. 110 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results Pair 4 Pair 3 Pair 2 Pair 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 The common-mode voltage on wire 8 induces voltage on wire 6, but not wire 3, so pair 3 develops a differential voltage. GPU93.EPS Figure 55. Common-Mode Voltage Converts to Differential-Mode Voltage in an RJ45 Connector GPU91.PNG Figure 56. CDNEXT Plot 111 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) Transverse conversion loss is the ratio (in dB) of a common-mode voltage measured on a wire pair relative to a differential-mode voltage applied to the same end of the pair. The TCL value shows you how well the impedances of the pair’s conductors are balanced. A high TCL value means that the impedances of the conductors relative to ground are almost equal. High TCL values correspond to better noise immunity and lower emissions. Differential and Common-Mode Signals To increase noise immunity and decrease the emissions of twisted pair cabling, network equipment transmits and receives signals in differential mode. Differential-mode uses two signals that have equal amplitudes and opposite polarities. The transmitter applies one signal to each wire in a pair, and the receiver measures the voltage between the wires. Because the voltages on the two wires have equal amplitudes and opposite polarities, the electromagnetic fields around the wires cancel each other out. The twisting of the pairs improves the cancellation. Because the pair emits almost no electromagnetic radiation, it causes almost no noise in other wire pairs. Differential-mode signaling also reduces electrical noise on the pair from outside sources such as electric motors and nearby pairs. Electromagnetic fields from outside sources cause voltages that have the same amplitudes and polarities on each wire in the pair. These are common-mode voltages. Because the difference in the noise voltage between the wires is zero, the receiver rejects commonmode signals, and the noise does not show in the network signals on the pair (Figure 57, top). Effects of Unbalanced Impedance in a Wire Pair If the wires in a pair have unequal impedances to ground, the common-mode voltages induced on the pair by nearby electromagnetic fields converts to differential-mode noise that interferes with the data signal. (Figure 57, bottom). Conversely, an unbalanced pair radiates unwanted electromagnetic radiation. This occurs because the opposing, differential signals are not equal, so the they are partially converted to common mode. Common-mode power on a wire pair produces more radiation than 112 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results the same amount of power in differential mode because the common-mode radiation from the wires does not cancel when the wires are close together. TCL and the related measurement of ELTCTL are important for evaluating the performance of links installed in industrial premises because of the high level of EMI caused by industrial equipment, and the problems that EMI causes in networking equipment. Figure 58 shows the TCL plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. Balanced pair +1 V +0.5 V noise spike +0.5 V noise spike -1 V +1.5 V -0.5 V +2.0 V Differential-mode signal remains at 2 V When the wires have equal impedance, EMI adds the same amplitude of noise to each wire, so no differential voltage is induced. Unbalanced pair +1 V +1.0 V noise spike -1 V +0.5 V noise spike +2.0 V -0.5 V +2.5 V 0.5 V spike of differential noise added to the signal When the wires have different impedances, EMI adds different amplitudes of noise to each wire. This induces differential noise that interferes with the data signal. GPU67.EPS Figure 57. The Effects of EMI on Balanced and Unbalanced Twisted Pairs 113 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook GPU78.PNG Figure 58. TCL Plot 114 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling Twisted Pair Autotest Results ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) Because of insertion loss, end-to-end mode conversion is less on longer cables than on shorter cables of the same type. Subtracting the effects of insertion loss normalizes the results for length and produces ELTCTL values, which are not dependent on length. Because ELTCTL does not depend on length, it is used instead of TCTL to evaluate cable performance. Figure 59 shows the ELTCTL plot. The tester puts the cursor at the worst margin. GPU80.PNG Figure 59. ELTCTL Plot 115 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook DIAGNOSTIC Tab If the Autotest failed or had a marginal result, or if you selected All Autotests for the HDTDR/HDTDX setting on the TEST SETUP screen, the DIAGNOSTIC tab gives you access to the HDTDR and HDTDX analyzer plots. The plots help you find the causes of NEXT and return loss failures. See Chapter 3. About dB Rules For some test limits, the tester ignores the PASS/FAIL result from some tests when a measurement is less than a specified value. For example, the return loss measurement is not evaluated against the limit at frequencies where insertion loss is less than 3 dB. This is the 3 dB rule. When a measurement is not evaluated against a limit, the tester shows an for the result. On the plot for that measurement, the limit line is black where the result is not evaluated against the limit, as shown in Figure 60. When you upload the results to LinkWare, N/A shows for the result. For some ISO limits, if the result from the calculation of a limit value is more than a specified value, then the limit is set to that value. For example, for the ACR-F limit for the ISO Class EA test limit, if the calculation of the limit value at a frequency gives a result that is more than 65 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 65 dB. The next sections summarize the dB rules. Tables 3, 4, 5, and 6 show the dB rules that apply to each test and the test limits that use the rules. For more information, see the Knowledge Base on the Fluke Networks website. 116 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling About dB Rules Below this frequency, insertion loss is less than 3.0 dB. Below this frequency, the limit line for return loss is black because RL is not evaluated against the limit. When the plot shows all pairs, the limit line is red where any pair was evaluated. GPU58.EPS Figure 60. How the 3 dB Rule Shows on Plots 117 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 3 dB Rule At frequencies where insertion loss is less than 3.0 dB for a pair, return loss for that pair is not evaluated against a limit. 4 dB Rule This rule applies to the limits in Tables 3, 4, 5, and 6 and to these limits: EN 50173 Aus/NZ JIS At frequencies where insertion loss is less than 4.0 dB for the pair used as the receive pair for the test, the measurements shown in Tables 3, 4, 5, and 6 are not evaluated against a limit. 12 dB Rule This rule applies to these test limits: ISO11801 Channel Class EA ISO11801 PL Class EA If insertion loss is less than 12 dB for both pairs, the tester uses a relaxed limit for NEXT. If the standard and relaxed limits both apply to a plot, the plot shows both limit lines. See the Knowledge Base on the Fluke Networks website for details. 62 dB and 65 dB Rules If the result from the calculation of a limit value is more than a specified value, then the limit is set to that value. For example, for the ACR-F limit for the ISO Class EA test limit, if the calculation of the limit value at a frequency gives a result that is more than 65 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 65 dB. See Tables 5 and 6 for applicable limits. 118 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling About dB Rules 67 dB Rule At frequencies where PS FEXT is less than 67 dB, PS ACR-F cannot fail. See Tables 3 and 6 for applicable limits. 70 dB Rule These rules applies to all channel or permanent link test limits where ACR-F is measured. At frequencies where FEXT is less than 70 dB for the pair used as the receive pair for the FEXT test, ACR-F cannot fail. See Tables 4, 5, and 6 for applicable limits. Table 3. dB Rules for TIA Permanent Link Test Limits Measurement Return Loss NEXT2 PS NEXT2 ACR-N 2 2 PS ACR-N ACR-F3 1 Cat 5e Cat 6 Cat 6A 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 67 dB 1. If insertion loss is less than 3 dB, Return Loss measurements are ignored. 2. If insertion loss is less than 4 dB, these measurements are ignored. 3. If FEXT is less than 67 dB, ACR-F measurements are ignored. 119 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 4. dB Rules for TIA Channel Test Limits Measurement Cat 5e Cat 6 Cat 6A Return Loss1 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB NEXT2 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 2 PS NEXT 3 70 dB ACR-F 1. If insertion loss is less than 3 dB, Return Loss measurements are ignored. 2. If insertion loss is less than 4 dB, these measurements are ignored. 3. If FEXT is less than 70 dB, ACR-F measurements are ignored. Table 5. dB Rules for ISO Permanent Link Test Limits Measurement Class D Class E Class EA Class F Class FA 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB PS NEXT 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB ACR-N2 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB PS ACR-N2 4 dB 4 dB Return Loss1 2 NEXT 2 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 3 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 4 ACR-F 65 dB 65 dB 65 dB PS ACR-F5 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB PS ACR-F6 62 dB 62 dB 62 dB ACR-F 1. 2. 3. 4. If insertion loss is less than 3 dB, Return Loss measurements are ignored. If insertion loss is less than 4 dB, these measurements are ignored. If FEXT is less than 70 dB, ACR-F measurements are ignored. If the calculation of the FEXT limit value at a frequency is more than 65 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 65 dB. 5. If PSFEXT is less than 70 dB, PS ACR-F measurements are ignored. 6. If the calculation of the PSFEXT limit value at a frequency is more than 62 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 62 dB. 120 Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling About dB Rules Table 6. dB Rules for ISO Channel Test Limits Measurement Class D Class E Class EA Class F Class FA Return Loss1 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB NEXT2 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 2 PS NEXT 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB 3 ACR-F 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB ACR-F4 65 dB 65 dB 65 dB PS ACR-F5 67 dB 67 dB 67 dB 6 62 dB 62 dB 62 dB PS ACR-F 1. 2. 3. 4. If insertion loss is less than 3 dB, Return Loss measurements are ignored. If insertion loss is less than 4 dB, these measurements are ignored. If FEXT is less than 70 dB, ACR-F measurements are ignored. If the calculation of the FEXT limit value at a frequency is more than 65 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 65 dB. 5. If PSFEXT is less than 67 dB, PS ACR-F measurements are ignored. 6. If the calculation of the PSFEXT limit value at a frequency is more than 62 dB, then the limit at that frequency is 62 dB. 121 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use the Talk Function If you have two testers and two DSX CableAnalyzer modules, you can use the talk function to talk to the person at the other end of a twisted pair link. Note The talk mode does not operate during tests. To use the talk function 1 Connect the main and remote testers together through a link that has one or more good wire pairs. 2 Connect headsets to the headset jacks on the testers (see Figure 20 on page 60). 3 Press the button on one of the headset microphones or press on the remote tester, then speak into the microphone. When the talk function is on, shows at the top of the screen on the main tester. On the remote tester, the TALK LED is on. 4 To adjust the volume at the main tester, press the button on the headset’s microphone as necessary, or move the slider control in the Talk Enabled window. To adjust the volume at the remote tester, press or the button on the headset’s microphone as necessary. The LEDs on the remote show the volume level. 5 122 To turn off the talk function, hold down the button on one of the headsets or hold down on the remote tester. Chapter 3: How to Certify Twisted Pair Cabling About the AxTalk Analyzer Kit About the AxTalk Analyzer Kit The DSX-5000 kit includes the hardware and AxTalk Analyzer software you need to do tests for alien crosstalk on twisted pair cabling. Alien crosstalk is noise, or crosstalk, transmitted between adjacent cables in a bundle or patch panel. Alien crosstalk is a primary source of noise in cabling used for 10GBASE-T applications. For instructions on how to do alien crosstalk tests, install the AxTalk Analyzer software supplied on the AxTalk Analyzer software CD, then see the online help in the software. 123 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 124 Chapter 4: How to Test Twisted Pair Through a PoE Device The AC wire map test lets you see the wire maps of links connected through midspan PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices. Midspan PoE devices block the dc signals the tester uses to do the wire map test. When you turn on the AC wire map test, the tester uses AC signals instead of DC signals for the wire map test. This setting does not change how the tester does other tests. How to Turn On the AC Wire Map Test 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, select a twisted pair test to change, then tap EDIT. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap the AC Wire Map control to set it to On. 4 Tap SAVE. When the AC Wire Map test is on, this icon shows on the home screen: When to Keep the AC Wire Map Test Off Turn off the AC wire map test when you do not do tests through PoE devices. The test can increase the time taken for an Autotest. Turn off the AC wire map test when you select TIA Cat 6 or 6A or Class E or EA limits. The return loss test on PoE devices will always fail with these limits because PoE devices are not designed to operate with protocols above 1000BASE-T. To use those limits on a link that has PoE, do not do tests through the PoE device. 125 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Turn off the AC wire map test if the PoE device supplies power on pairs 4,5 and 7,8. In those devices, the inputs and outputs are fully isolated on those pairs. To do tests through those devices, use a PoE test limit such as POE 2-Pair Cat 6 Perm. Link. The PoE limits are in the Application group on the TEST LIMIT screen. How to Do an Autotest Through a PoE Device 1 Turn on the AC Wire Map test. 2 Make sure that the other settings shown on the home screen are correct. 3 Connect to the cabling as shown in Figure 7 for a permanent link or Figure 8 for a channel 4 Make sure that the PoE device is turned off. 5 Do an Autotest as described on page 75. Notes When you turn on the AC wire map test: 126 The Autotest takes more time. The tester does not do some tests, such the resistance test and the shield test. The Autotest does not stop if there is a wire map fault. The tester does not do a continuity test on the shield. Chapter 4: How to Test Twisted Pair Through a PoE Device How to Do an Autotest Through a PoE Device Horizontal cabling Optional consolidation point Patch panel Unpowered midspan PoE device Start permanent link Tester with permanent link adapter Wall outlet End permanent link Remote with permanent link adapter GPU94.EPS Figure 7. Permanent Link Connections Through a PoE Device 127 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Horizontal cabling Patch panels Patch cord from hub or switch Midspan device Optional consolidation point Wall outlet Patch cord from PC Start channel Hub or switch Tester with channel adapter End channel Remote with channel adapter GPU95.EPS Figure 8. Channel Connections Through a PoE Device AC Wire Map Results AC wire map results are similar to the wire map results shown in Chapter 3. In some cases, the fault information given by AC wire maps is less specific. For example, if a wire is shorted to a wire in another pair, the AC wire map shows all four wires shorted. This occurs because the AC electrical characteristics of some faults prevent some types of measurements. Figures 9 and 10 show examples of AC wire map screens. When the tester cannot show the wire map because it has multiple faults, it shows a list of the faults (see Figure 10). 128 Chapter 4: How to Test Twisted Pair Through a PoE Device AC Wire Map Results Note To isolate faults when the tester shows limited wire map information, turn off the AC wire map test, then do tests on the cabling after the PoE device. Also do a test on the patch cord that connects the PoE device to the link. GPU150.PNG GPU151.PNG Open Short Open on pair 4,5. The open is 36 m from the tester and 14 m from the remote. The open is on one or both wires. Short between pairs 1,2 and 3,6. The short is 5 m from the remote. The short is between two, three, or all four wires. Figure 9. AC Wire Map Examples: Open and Short 129 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook GPU153.PNG GPU152.PNG Crossed pairs Pairs 1,2 and 3,6 are crossed. Multiple faults This cable has a short between wires 6 and 7 and an open on pin 2. For some combinations of faults, the tester cannot show the wire map because the AC electrical characteristics of some faults prevent some types of measurements. Figure 10. AC Wire Map Examples: 130 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures Table 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures Wire Map test fails Open Wires connected to wrong pins at connector or punchdown blocks Bad connection Damaged connector or cable Wrong application for the cable or the wrong outlet configuration is selected Short Damaged connector or cable Conductive material stuck between pins at connector Incorrect termination at a connector Wrong application for the cable Split pair, reversed pair, or crossed wires Wires connected to wrong pins at connector or punchdown block Note The HDTDX analyzer can help you locate split pairs. See page 135. Crossed pairs Wires connected to wrong pins at connector or punchdown block Mix of T568A and T568B wiring standards (1,2 and 3,6 crossed) Crossover cables used where not needed (1,2 and 3,6 crossed) A test passes, but the plot shows that measurements exceed the limit A dB rule possibly applies. See “About dB Rules” on page 116. -continued- 131 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures (continued) Resistance test gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Link is too long (may need to remove coiled service loops) Bad connection due to oxidized or loose contacts Wire gauge is too thin Wires in a pair have too much difference in the number of twists (resistance is unbalanced) Wrong type of patch cord used Note The HDTDR analyzer can help you locate the cause of a resistance failure. See page 143. Length gives a FAIL result Link is too long (may need to remove coiled service loops) NVP is set incorrectly Length exceeds the limit, but the length test did not fail If the length of the shortest pair does not exceed the limit by 10 %, then the length test passes even if other pairs exceed the limit. This is the 10 % rule for length, as given in the ANSI/TIA standard. See the Fluke Networks Knowledge base for details. Propagation delay or delay skew gives FAIL result Link is too long (may need to remove coiled service loops) Cable has different insulation materials on different pairs. This causes differences in the twist ratios, which causes differences in propagation delays among pairs. “Bad patch cord” message (indicates excessive crosstalk over the first or last 2 m of the cabling) Wire pairs are untwisted too much in the RJ45 plug Poor quality patch cord used for channel Cable on a permanent link interface adapter is badly distorted or damaged Wrong test standard selected 132 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures Table 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures (continued) Insertion loss gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Link is too long (may need to remove coiled service loops) Poor quality patch cord Bad connection (possibly shows insertion loss failure on only one or two pairs) Wrong cable type in the installation Wrong test standard selected Wet lubricant in a conduit with unshielded cable. Possibly, the test will pass after the lubricant dries. Characteristic impedance exceeds the limit or an anomaly is detected Bad connection Cable compression (tight cable ties, pinches, kinks, etc.) Mismatch of cable types Water in cable jacket Return loss gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Patch cord or cable impedance not 100 Patch cord handling causing changes in impedance Excessive amount of cable jammed into outlet box Tight service loops in telecommunications closet Excessive untwisting of pairs at connector Poor quality connectors Cable impedance not uniform (poor quality cable) Mismatches in cable construction (such as cable from different manufacturers) Water in the cable jacket (typically causes failures on all pairs at lower frequencies) -continued- 133 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures (continued) Return loss gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result (continued) Cable compression (tight cable ties, pinches, kinks, etc.) Poorly matched plug and jack (6A/Class EA applications) Wrong test standard selected Defective link interface adapter Note The HDTDR analyzer can help you locate the cause of a return loss failure. See page 143. NEXT, PS NEXT, ACR-N, PS ACR-N, ACR-F, PS ACR-F gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Excessive untwisting of pairs at a connector Poor quality patch cords Poor quality connectors Poor quality cable Poorly matched plug and jack (6A/Class EA applications) Incorrect link interface adapter Cable compression that distorts the pattern of twists in the pairs (tight cable ties, pinches, kinks, etc.) Inappropriate use of couplers Excessive noise source near cabling under test Wrong test standard selected Note The HDTDX analyzer can help you locate the cause of a NEXT failure. See page 135. Correcting NEXT problems usually corrects ACR-F problems. 134 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures The HDTDR Analyzer Table 7. Causes of Twisted Pair Test Failures (continued) TCL or ELTCTL gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Unequal untwisting of pairs at a connector Poorly designed connectors Poorly designed cable Wrong test standard selected CDNEXT gives FAIL, FAIL*, or PASS* result Unequal untwisting of pairs at a connector Poorly designed connectors Wrong test standard selected The HDTDR Analyzer While return loss test results shows return loss relative to frequency, the HDTDR™ (High-Definition Time Domain Reflectometry) analyzer shows return loss relative to its distance from the tester. The HDTDR plot shows the locations and amplitudes of return loss signals to help you find the causes of return loss failures. After an Autotest, you can see HDTDR plot if the Autotest had a FAIL, FAIL* or PASS* result, or if HDTDX/HDTDR on the TEST SETUP screen was set to All Autotests when you did the test. To see the HDTDR plot for an Autotest, tap the DIAGNOSTIC tab on the Autotest results screen, then tap HDTDR ANALYZER. Figure 11 shows an example of an HDTDR plot. Note If Store Plot Data is off, the tester does not include the HDTDR plot with results you save. To get HDTDR analyzer results you can also tap Tools > Diagnostics, but you cannot save these results. Figure 12 shows how some common faults appear on HDTDR plots. 135 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook G A B C D E F GPU115.EPS Figure 11. HDTDR Plot The vertical scale shows the percentage of the signal reflected back to the main tester. The amplitudes of signals on the plot show how much the impedance of the cabling changes. The measurement cursor. The box at the bottom of the cursor shows the distance from the start of the cabling to the cursor. To measure distance, tap the yellow circle so that MARK shows, drag the cursor to the start of the measurement, tap MARK, then drag the cursor to the end of the measurement. See “How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot” on page 143. The horizontal scale shows the distance along the cabling. 136 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures The HDTDR Analyzer Tap to see help for this screen. The Value is the value of the return loss at the cursor’s position. The value is the percentage of the signal reflected back to the main tester. If the plot shows all cable pairs, the value shown is the largest of all the pairs. The tester adjusts the values of return loss for insertion loss so that the plot shows the values as they are at the sources of the reflections. To see the plots for individual pairs, tap or . To select pairs to show on the plot, touch or for one second to see the SELECT PAIRS window. Select the pairs you want to see, then tap OK. The orange, dashed lines are at the start and end of the cabling that the tester includes in the test results. To zoom in and out, use the pinch, reverse-pinch, and doubletap gestures on the touchscreen. You can also use the zoom controls to change the magnification on the distance and amplitude scales independently. See Figure 5 on page 18. Note For HDTDR plots for short cables such as patch cords, the tester does not change the magnification for the distance (horizontal) scale. 137 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Open Short Bad patch cord Water in the cable jacket GPU100.EPS Figure 12. Typical Faults Shown on HDTDR Plots Open on pair 4,5 at approximately 24.3 m. A positive reflection is an increase in impedance. Short on pair 1,2 at approximately 13.4 m. A negative reflection is a decrease in impedance. Bad patch cord approximately 18.3 m from the main tester. This patch cord was badly damaged. A link with a section of cable that has water in the jacket. 138 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures The HDTDX Analyzer The HDTDX Analyzer While NEXT test results shows crosstalk signals relative to frequency, the HDTDX™ (High-Definition Time Domain Crosstalk) analyzer shows crosstalk signals relative to their distance from the tester. The HDTDX plot shows the locations and amplitudes of crosstalk signals to help you find the causes of NEXT and ACR-F failures. After an Autotest, you can see HDTDX plot if the Autotest had a FAIL, FAIL* or PASS* result, or if HDTDX/HDTDR on the TEST SETUP screen was set to All Autotests when you did the test. To see the HDTDX plot for an Autotest, tap the DIAGNOSTIC tab on the Autotest results screen, then tap HDTDX ANALYZER. Figure 14 shows an example of an HDTDX plot. Note If Store Plot Data is off, the tester does not include the HDTDX plot with results you save. To get HDTDX analyzer results you can also tap Tools > Diagnostics, but you cannot save these results. Figure 14 shows how some common faults appear on HDTDX plots. 139 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook G A B C D E F GPU114.EPS Figure 13. HDTDX Plot To zoom in and out, use the pinch, reverse-pinch, and doubletap gestures on the touchscreen. You can also use the zoom controls to change the magnification on the distance and amplitude scales independently. See Figure 5 on page 18. Note For HDTDX plots for short cables such as patch cords, the tester does not change the magnification for the distance (horizontal) scale. 140 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures The HDTDX Analyzer The vertical scale shows the amplitudes of the crosstalk signals. The numbers on the scale are for reference only and do not have units. The values on the scale are related to the limits for NEXT in the selected test limit. For example, a crosstalk signal that goes to 20 on the scale when you use a Cat 5 limit goes to over 40 when you use a Cat 6 limit. The orange, dashed lines are at the start and end of the cabling that the tester includes in the test results. The horizontal scale shows the distance along the cabling. Tap to see help for this screen. The Value is the value of the crosstalk at the cursor’s position. If the plot shows all cable pairs, the value shown is the largest of all the pairs. The tester adjusts the values of crosstalk for insertion loss so that the plot shows the values as they are at the sources of the crosstalk. To see the plots for individual pairs, tap or . To select pairs to show on the plot, touch or for one second to see the SELECT PAIRS window. Select the pairs you want to see, then tap OK. The measurement cursor. The box at the bottom of the cursor shows the distance from the start of the cabling to the cursor. To measure distance, tap the yellow circle so that MARK shows, drag the cursor to the start of the measurement, tap MARK, then drag the cursor to the end of the measurement. See “How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot” on page 143. 141 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Cat 5e test on Cat 5 cable Section of poorquality cable Poor-quality terminations Split pair GPU99.EPS Figure 14. Typical Faults Shown on HDTDX Plots Cat 5e test on a Cat 5 cable. Approximately 7 m of bad cable near the remote. Poor-quality terminations. A typical cause is excessive untwisting of the wire pairs. Split pair on 3,6-4,5. The split pair is in a patch cord approximately 19.5 m from the main tester. 142 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot You can use the cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX plots to measure the distance to a source of high return loss or crosstalk from any point on the plot. You can also measure the length of a segment or patch cord that causes high return loss or crosstalk. To use the measurement cursor to measure distance Refer to Figure 15. 1 Tap the yellow circle at the top of the cursor () so that MARK shows. 2 While MARK shows, use one of these methods to move the cursor to the point where you want to start the measurement: 3 Drag the cursor with the yellow circle (). Tap or press and hold or (). Tap MARK, then while UNMARK shows, move the cursor to the point where you want to end the measurement. Note If UNMARK and the cursor controls do not show, tap the yellow circle. The distance between the cursor and the mark shows below the plot (). 4 To make a new measurement, tap the yellow circle, tap UNMARK (), then do steps 1, 2, and 3 again. 143 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B H C C D G E F GPU113.EPS Figure 15. How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR or HDTDX Plot To specify the start of a measurement, tap the yellow circle (), then tap MARK. To see the MARK and UNMARK buttons, tap the yellow circle. When MARK or UNMARK shows, you can drag the cursor. To move the cursor in small increments, tap or press and hold or . If these buttons do not show, tap the yellow circle on the cursor. The measurement in the box is the distance from the start of the cabling to the cursor. The measured value of crosstalk or return loss at the cursor’s location. The distance between the start and end of the green measurement bar. 144 Chapter 5: How to Diagnose Copper Test Failures How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the HDTDR and HDTDX Plot The green measurement bar goes from the start point to the end point of your measurement. To start another measurement, tap UNMARK. If UNMARK does not show, tap the yellow circle (). 145 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 146 Chapter 6: How to Clean Fiber Endfaces When a fiber optic link does not operate correctly, the cause is frequently a dirty endface in a connector. Figure 16 shows examples of dirty endfaces and an endface that has been correctly cleaned and polished. Cleaned and polished correctly Wiped on a shirt Dirty connector on a patch cord Contamination that remains after alcohol dries Figure 16. Examples of Clean and Dirty Fiber Endfaces GPU36.EPS 147 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Always clean and inspect the endfaces in fiber connectors before you make connections. Fluke Networks recommends that you use a mechanical device, such as the Fluke Networks IBC OneClick Cleaner, to clean connectors. If you do not have such a device, or if the device does not clean the connector sufficiently, use other optical-grade supplies to clean connectors. Figure 17 shows the equipment you use to clean and inspect fiber endfaces. Warning To prevent possible eye damage caused by hazardous radiation: Do not look directly into optical connectors. Some optical equipment emits invisible radiation that can cause permanent damage your eyes. Before you clean an endface, turn off any optical sources (laser or LED) that are connected to the fiber. When you inspect endfaces, use only magnification devices that have the correct filters. Caution To prevent damage to connectors and to keep contamination off of endfaces: 148 Always cover unused connectors and adapters with protective caps. Always keep unused protective caps in a clean, sealed container to prevent contamination. Chapter 6: How to Clean Fiber Endfaces B C A Versiv main unit with CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro module installed Video probe with USB connector D GPU49.EPS Fiber cleaning supplies AC adapter with line cord (optional) (DI-1000 shown) Figure 17. Equipment to Clean and Inspect Fiber Endfaces 149 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use a Fluke Networks IBC OneClick Cleaner Caution To prevent damage to the device and to connectors and to keep contamination off of endfaces, read all instructions and obey all safety precautions given in the instructions for the device you use to clean connectors. To clean the connectors on test reference cords, use wipes, swabs, and solvent. The OneClick cleaner cleans the fiber core, but can leave contamination around the core. The contamination can move to the core when you make connections. See “To Clean Connector Ends” on page 154. 1 Use the video probe to inspect the connector. If it is dirty, continue to step 2. 2 To clean a bulkhead connector, remove the cap. To clean the connector on a fiber cable, remove only the tip of the cap. 3 If necessary for a bulkhead connector, extend the tip of the device. 4 Push the device straight into the connector until you hear a loud click. See Figure 18. Then remove the device. 5 Use the video probe to inspect the connector. If necessary, clean and inspect the connector again. If the mechanical device does not clean the connector sufficiently, use a swab and solvent to clean the connector. 150 Chapter 6: How to Clean Fiber Endfaces How to Use a Fluke Networks IBC OneClick Cleaner CLICK! CLICK! Figure 18. How to Use the IBC OneClick Cleaner GPU16.EPS 151 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use Wipes, Swabs, and Solvent Caution To prevent damage to connectors and to keep contamination off of endfaces: Always discard wipes or swabs after you use them. Do not let solvent dry on an endface. Some solvents leave a residue after they dry. If you must use alcohol as a solvent, make sure you use 99%-pure, anhydrous alcohol. To Clean Bulkhead Connectors 152 1 Use a video probe to inspect the connector. If it is dirty, continue to step 2. 2 Touch the tip of a fiber optic solvent pen or swab soaked in solvent to a lint-free dry wipe or fiber cleaning card. 3 Touch a new, dry swab to the solvent spot on the wipe or card. Push the swab into the connector, twist it around 3 to 5 times against the end-face, then remove and dispose of the swab. 4 Dry the connector with a dry swab by twisting it around in the connector 3 to 5 times. 5 Use a video probe to inspect the connector. If necessary, clean and inspect the connector again. Chapter 6: How to Clean Fiber Endfaces How to Use Wipes, Swabs, and Solvent To Clean the Optical Connectors on the Modules To clean the optical connectors on the modules, first use the procedure given under “To Clean Bulkhead Connectors”. If a connector is very dirty or the procedure above does not make it clean, use this procedure: 1 Unscrew the adapter on the connector. 2 Clean the ferrule or photodiode lens with a dry, optical-grade wipe made for fiber optic connectors. 3 Use a video probe to inspect the connector. If necessary, clean and inspect the connector again. 4 If the connector stays dirty, use a wipe that is moist with optical-grade solvent to clean the endface. Dry the ferrule with a dry wipe. Note If the OTDR Port Connection Quality gauge for the OptiFiber Pro module stays in the Poor range after you clean the OTDR connector, remove the adapter from the module and inspect the adapter for damage. Make sure that the white plastic ring inside the center tube shows no damage. To Clean Fiber Adapters At regular intervals, clean fiber adapters with a swab and fiber optic solvent. Dry with a dry swab. 153 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To Clean Connector Ends 1 Use a video probe to inspect the connector. If it is dirty, continue to step 2. 2 Touch the tip of a fiber optic solvent pen or swab soaked in solvent to a lint-free dry wipe or fiber cleaning card. 3 Wipe the connector end-face across the solvent spot, then back and forth once across the dry area of the wipe or card. 4 Use a video probe to inspect the connector. If necessary, clean and inspect the connector again. Note For some connector types, such as VF-45, it is necessary to use a different method to clean the endface. 154 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Warning Before you use the tester, read the safety information that starts on page 2. Overview of the CertiFiber Pro Optical Loss Test Set Modules The Fluke Networks CertiFiber® Pro Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) modules attach to Versiv™ main and remote units to make rugged, hand-held testers that let you certify, troubleshoot, and document optical fiber cabling installations. The testers include these features: Measures optical power loss and length on dual-fiber, multimode cabling at 850 nm and 1300 nm (CFP-MM) or on dual-fiber singlemode cabling at 1310 nm and 1550 nm (CFP-SM). The four-wavelength module (CFP-QUAD) measures at 850 nm, 1300 nm, 1310 nm, and 1550 nm. Interchangeable connector adapters on input and output ports let you make reference and test connections that agree with ISO standards for most SFF (small form factor) connectors. Visual fault locator helps you find breaks, bad splices, and bends and verify fiber continuity and polarity. You can save approximately 30,000 loss/length fiber test results in the tester’s internal memory. You can save more results on a removable flash drive. 155 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook CertiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs B C D E F A O N M L K J G H I GPU123.EPS Figure 19. Main CertiFiber Pro Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs (CFP-QUAD module shown) LCD display with touchscreen Singlemode output port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port transmits optical signals for loss and length measurements. 156 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling CertiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs The LED below the output port is red when the port transmits 1310 nm and green for 1550 nm. Input port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port receives optical signals for loss, length, and power measurements. Multimode output port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port transmits optical signals for loss and length measurements. The LED below the output port is red when the port transmits 850 nm and green for 1300 nm. Universal fiber connector (with dust cap) for the visual fault locator. The connector accepts 2.5 mm ferrules. The LED below the connector shows the locator’s mode. Button to manually control the output ports ( and ) and the visual fault locator (). Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can upload test results to the PC and install software updates in the tester. Type A USB port: This USB host port lets you save test results on a USB flash drive or connect a video probe to the tester. Headset jack : Starts a test. To start a test, you can also tap TEST on the display. : Power key : Press to go to the home screen. Connector for the AC adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. RJ45 connector: For functions available in future software releases. 157 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Decal with laser safety information. B C D E F A M L K G J I H GPU136.EPS Figure 20. Remote CertiFiber Pro Tester Connectors, Keys, and LEDs (CFP-QUAD module shown) 158 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling CertiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs PASS LED comes on when a test passes. TEST LED comes on during a test. FAIL LED comes on when a test fails. TALK LED comes on when the talk function is on. LOW BATTERY LED comes on when the battery is low. The LEDs also have these functions: Battery gauge (see Figure 3 on page 15) Volume indicator for the TALK function Progress indicator for software updates Singlemode output port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port transmits optical signals for loss and length measurements. The LED below the output port is red when the port transmits 1310 nm and green for 1550 nm. Input port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port receives optical signals for loss, length, and power measurements. Multimode output port with removable connector adapter and dust cap. This port transmits optical signals for loss and length measurements. The LED below the output port is red when the port transmits 850 nm and green for 1300 nm. Universal fiber connector (with dust cap) for the visual fault locator. The connector accepts 2.5 mm ferrules. The LED below the connector shows the locator’s mode. Button to manually control the output ports ( and ) and the visual fault locator (). Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can install software updates in the tester. Headset jack 159 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook : Starts a test. : Power key : Press to use the headset to speak to the person at the other end of the link. Press again to adjust the volume. To turn off the talk function, hold down . Connector for the AC adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page 13. Decal with laser safety information. How to Remove and Install the Connector Adapters You can change the connector adapters on the input ports of the modules to connect to SC, ST, LC, and FC fiber connectors. You can remove the adapter on the output port to clean the fiber endface in the port. See Figure 21. 160 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling How to Remove and Install the Connector Adapters Caution Turn only the collar on the adapter. Do not use tools to remove or install the adapters. Caution Do not touch the photodiode lens. Slot Put the key into the slot before you turn the collar on the adapter. Key Key Slot Keep extra adapters in the containers provided. GPU135.EPS Figure 21. How to Remove and Install the Connector Adapters 161 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The Home Screen for CertiFiber Pro Modules The home screen (Figure 22) shows important test settings. Before you do a test, make sure these settings are correct. LM K A B C J D E F G H I GPU117.EPS Figure 22. The Home Screen for CertiFiber Pro Modules PROJECT: The project contains the settings for a job and helps you monitor the status of a job. When you save test results, the tester puts them in the project. Tap the PROJECT panel to edit the project settings, select a different project, or make a new project. 162 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling The Home Screen for CertiFiber Pro Modules Shows a summary of the test results in the project: The number of tests that passed. The number of tests that failed. The test setup panel shows the settings the tester will use when you tap TEST or press . To change these settings, tap the panel, select the test on the CHANGE TEST screen, tap EDIT, select different settings on the TEST SETUP screen, then tap SAVE. See Table 8 on page 172. Note You can set up tests for any module that the tester can use, even when no module is attached. Next ID: The Next ID panel shows the ID that the tester gives to the next test results you save. For Smart Remote mode, this panel shows IDs for main tester’s input and output fibers. Tap Next ID to do these tasks: Enter an ID, select a different ID in the ID set, select a different set of IDs, or make a new set. The tester adds the IDs and ID sets you make to the project that shows on the home screen. Turn Auto Save on or off. Operator: The name of the person who does the job. You can enter a maximum of 20 operator names. TOOLS: The TOOLS menu lets you set the reference for fiber tests, see the status of the tester, and set user preferences such as the language and the display brightness. SET REF: Tap SET REF to set the reference and verify your test reference cords for loss/length tests. RESULTS: Tap RESULTS to see and manage the results that are saved in the tester. TEST: Tap TEST to do the test shown in the test setup panel. 163 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The percentage of the tests in the project that are completed. The tester uses the number of available IDs to calculate this percentage. See Figure 71 on page 318. % Tested does not show if your project contains only a Next ID list. See “About Next ID Sets” on page 339 for more information about the Next ID list. The type of module attached to the tester. This icon shows when the input and output ports on the tester’s CertiFiber Pro module are connected to the ports on the remote’s CertiFiber Pro module, the remote tester is turned on, and a fiber loss/length test type is selected. This icon shows when the talk function is on. To use the talk function. See “How to Use the Talk Function” on page 208. Requirements for Reliable Fiber Test Results To get reliable fiber test results and make sure your tester meets its accuracy specifications, you must use the correct procedures: 164 Use proper cleaning procedures to clean all fiber connectors before every use. See Chapter 6. Set the reference frequently. See “About the Reference for Fiber Tests” on page 165. Use only test reference cords that comply with ISO/IEC 14763-3. Measure the loss of the cords frequently. See “About Test Reference Cords and Mandrels” on page 167. For multimode fiber, make sure you use the encircled flux test reference cords (EF-TRCs) or standard mandrels correctly. See “About the EF-TRC (Encircled-Flux Test Reference Cords)” on page 167 and “Caution” on page 169. Keep the tester’s software current. The latest software is available on the Fluke Networks website. See “Update the Software” on page 360. Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Requirements for Reliable Fiber Test Results Make sure you select the correct fiber type and test limit for the job, and the index of refraction for the fiber is correct. See Table 8 on page 172. Make sure the battery is fully charged. Send the modules to a Fluke Networks service center every 12 months for factory calibration. About the Reference for Fiber Tests The reference procedure for fiber cable sets a baseline power level for loss measurements. If the power level that enters the fiber from the source changes, the reference and your loss measurements will be incorrect. The power level can change, for example, when the temperature at the job site increases or decreases or when you disconnect then reconnect a test reference cord at the tester’s output port. So, it is important to set the reference frequently. When to Set the Reference Note At the job site, turn on the testers and let them sit for a minimum of 5 minutes before you set the reference. Let them sit longer if they are above or below ambient temperature. The tester requires you to set the reference at these times: When you change the CertiFiber Pro module in the main or remote tester. When you use a different remote tester. When you change the Reference Method in the test setup. Set the reference also at these times: At the start of each day, at the job site, then at regular intervals during the day. For example, set the reference when you start tests on a different series of fibers. 165 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook When you connect a test reference cord to the module’s output port or to another source, even if you connect the same test reference cord you connected before. When the tester tells you that the reference is out of date. When a loss measurement is negative. This occurs when there was a problem when you set the reference. For example, an endface was dirty or the testers were cold. Caution Do not disconnect the test reference cords from the modules’ output ports after you set the reference. If you do, you will change the amount of optical power that enters the fiber and the reference will not be correct. Good Reference Values Reference values must be in these ranges: Multimode 50/125 µm fiber: -19.4 dBm to -26.5 dBm Multimode 62.5/125 µm fiber: -17.5 dBm to -23.0 dBm Singlemode fiber: -1.0 dBm to -6.0 dBm If your reference value is outside of the applicable range given above, clean and inspect all connectors then set the reference again. Do this even if the tester lets you use the value. If your test reference cords and connectors are in good condition, and you use the correct procedure to set the reference, the reference value will not change by more than approximately 0.4 dBm. How to See the Reference Values 166 After you set the reference, tap View Reference on the SET REFERENCE screen. After you do an Autotest, tap the result window for a fiber, then tap VIEW REFERENCE. Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Requirements for Reliable Fiber Test Results About Test Reference Cords and Mandrels Use only test reference cords (TRCs) that have low loss: Maximum loss for multimode TRCs: 0.15 dB Maximum loss for singlemode TRCs: 0.25 dB To make sure your test results are accurate as possible: Inspect the endfaces of the TRCs every 24 to 48 tests and clean them when necessary. Use the TRC VERIFICATION wizard available for the 1 Jumper Method and 3 Jumper reference methods to measure the losses of the TRCs. The losses of the TRCs are included in the loss measurements for links, so you must make sure the losses are very small. The wizard saves the results of the TRC tests to show that your TRCs were good. IDs for these results start with “TRC”, show the date and time of the test, and have an for the test result. About the EF-TRC (Encircled-Flux Test Reference Cords) The CFP-MM and CFP-QUAD kits includes the EF-TRC (encircled flux test reference cords), which have signal conditioners on the cords. When you use the EF-TRCs with the CertiFiber Pro multimode modules, your tester complies with IEC 61280-4-1, ISO/ IEC 14763-3, and TIA-526-14-B standards for encircled flux. Measurements made with compliant equipment change less than 10 % for losses of 1 dB or more when you make them at different times or with different equipment that is also compliant. Note The IEC 61280-4-1, ISO/IEC 14763-3, and TIA-526-14-B standards require your optical loss test set to comply with encircled flux standards at 850 nm with 50 µm/125 µm fiber. The standards recommend compliance at 850 nm with 62.5 µm/ 125 µm fiber and at 1300 nm with 50 µm/125 µm and 62.5 µm/125 µm fiber. 167 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Caution To prevent damage to fiber connectors, to prevent data loss, and to make sure that your test results are as accurate as possible: Use the EF-TRC cords only with the CertiFiber Pro modules or with sources approved by Fluke Networks for use with the cords. If a source does not have the correct LED and internal fibers, the EF-TRC cords will not make launch conditions that agree with encircled flux standards. When you use the EF-TRCs, DO NOT use other mandrels. Always follow the handling guidelines given in Figure 23. Put protective caps on all connectors when you do not use them. Use EF-TRCs that have the fiber core dimension (50 µm or 62. µm) and type of connectors (SC, ST, LC, or FC) that are the same as the fiber link. Do not use EF-TRCs with hybrid patch cords to connect to links that have other types of connectors. About Standard Mandrels Standard mandrels make measurements of multimode power loss more reliable than if you use no mandrels, but the measurements do not comply with the standards for encircled flux. Fluke Networks recommends that you always use only the EF-TRCs with the CertiFiber Pro multimode modules so that your measurements comply with EF standards. If you must do tests in Far End Source mode with a different multimode source, and the source is not approved by Fluke Networks for use with the TRCs, use standard mandrels. Make sure you use the size of mandrel that is correct for 50 µm or 62.5 µm fiber, and read all instructions for the source and mandrel. 168 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Requirements for Reliable Fiber Test Results Minimum bend diameter: 1.2 in (30 mm) GPU157.EPS Figure 23. How to Prevent Damage to the EF-TRC Fiber Cables Caution If you use mandrels for tests on multimode fiber, do not use test reference cords made from bendinsensitive fiber. The mandrels possibly will not remove all of the modes that can make your loss measurements unreliable. 169 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook About APC Connectors When you do tests on links with APC (angled physical contact) connectors, use only test reference cords with APC connectors on the ends connected to the link. If you connect non-APC connectors to the link, the connectors will cause large reflections that make loss measurements inaccurate. For tests on links with APC connectors, use test reference cords with APC connectors on the ends connected to the tester’s input ports. This is necessary for the 1 jumper reference method. You can connect APC connectors to the tester’s input ports because the fiber does not touch the lens on the input port. Connect only UPC connectors to the tester’s output ports. Settings for Loss/Length Tests on Fiber Table 8 gives descriptions of the settings for loss/length tests on fiber. To set up a project, which includes the settings in Table 8, cable IDs, and operator names, see Chapter 14. To set up a loss/length test 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, select a fiber test to change, then tap EDIT. Or to set up a new fiber test, tap NEW TEST. If no module is installed, the MODULE screen shows. Tap the correct CertiFiber Pro module. 170 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap the panels to change settings for the test. See Table 8. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE when your test setup is completed. 5 On the CHANGE TEST screen, make sure the button next to the test is selected, then tap USE SELECTED. Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Some test limits do not specify a limit for loss measurements. They specify maximum values of loss per kilometer of fiber and for the connectors and splices in the link. Then, the tester uses the measured length of the link, the number of connectors in the link, and the number of splices in the link to calculate a loss limit for that link. When you select such a limit, you must enter the number of connectors and splices that are in the link. To enter these values, tap Reference Method or No. of Connections/Splices on the TEST SETUP screen. See No. of Connections/Splices in Table 8 on page 174. 171 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 8. Settings for Fiber Tests Setting Description Module Select the CertiFiber Pro module you will use. To select a different module, tap the Module panel on the TEST SETUP screen, then tap a module. Test Type Use Smart Remote mode for tests on duplex-fiber cabling. See page 178. Use Loopback mode for tests on patch cords and cable spools. See page 190. Use Far End Source mode for tests on single fibers. See page 198. Bi-Directional Off: The tester does fiber tests in only one direction. On: The tester does fiber tests in both directions. See “BiDirectional Tests” on page 206. The Bi-Directional setting is not available for Far End Source mode. Fiber Type Select a fiber type that is correct for the type you will test. To see a different group of fiber types, tap MORE, then tap a group. To make a custom fiber type, tap Custom in the Fiber Groups list. See Chapter 15 Note When you select a fiber type, the TEST LIMIT screens show only the limits that are compatible with that fiber type. Fiber Type Settings IOR: The tester uses the index of refraction to calculate the optical length of the fiber. Each fiber type includes the value specified by the manufacturer. To use a different IOR, make a custom fiber type. See Chapter 15. Test Limit Select the correct test limit for the job. To see a different group of limits, tap MORE, then tap the name of a group. To make a custom limit, tap Custom in the Limit Groups list. See Chapter 15 Note The TEST LIMIT screens show only the limits that are compatible with the selected fiber type. 172 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Table 8. Settings for Fiber Tests (continued) Reference Method On the No. of Connectors/Splices screen, set the number of jumpers you will use in each fiber path when you set the reference. The dotted lines in the diagram on the screen show you which parts of the link are included in the test results. The number of jumpers you use has these effects on loss measurements: 1 Jumper: Loss measurements include the connections at both ends of the link. The figures in this manual show 1 Jumper connections. 2 Jumper: Loss measurements include one connection at one end of the link. 3 Jumper: Loss measurements do not include the connections at the ends of the link. The tester measures only the loss of the fiber. This setting does not change the loss measurements, but it can change the PASS/FAIL result for test limits that use a calculated loss limit. For all test limits, the tester saves this setting to show the reference method you used. Caution Most cable manufacturers will give you a warranty on a fiber installation only if you use the 1 Jumper reference method when you certify the installation. Note Different standards use different names for the three methods. See Appendix B. For more information about the methods, see Connector Type Select the type of connector, such as SC or LC, used in the cabling. The tester saves this setting to record the type of connector you used. This setting does not change your test results or any of the diagrams that the tester shows. If the correct type is not in the list, select General. (continued) 173 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 8. Settings for Fiber Tests (continued) No. of Connectors/ Splices The Total Connections and Splices setting are applicable only if the selected test limit uses a calculated limit for loss. Total Connections: Enter the total number of connections that are in each path of the link. Do not adjust the number for the Reference Method you use. For example, if the link has 3 connections, enter “3” even if you use the 2 or 3 Jumper reference method. When the tester calculates the loss limit, it automatically removes the losses of the connections you used to set the reference. Note The CertiFiber Pro automatically adjusts the number of connections for the Reference Method you use. This is different from the DTX CableAnalyzer, where you do not include the reference connections in the number of connectors. Splices: Enter the number of splices in each path of the link. Jumpers: Enter the number of jumpers you will use in each fiber path when you set the reference. The dotted lines in the diagram on the screen show you which parts of the link are included in the test results. See Reference Method above. Figure 24 shows the No. of Connectors/Splices screen. Figure 25 shows how to count the jumpers, connectors, and splices for this setting. TRC LENGTH (Test reference cord length) 174 You can enter length of your test reference cords when you set the reference. To enter this value, tap TRC LENGTH on the SET REFERENCE screen. The length you enter does not change the test results. The tester saves the length with the results to meet TIA reporting requirements. Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit D E A F B C G H GPU140.EPS Figure 24. Screen to Set the Number of Connectors, Splices, and Jumpers Total Connections: Enter the total number of connections that are in each path of the link. Do not adjust the number for the Reference Method you use. For example, if the link has 3 connections, enter “3” even if you use the 2 or 3 Jumper reference method. When the tester calculates the loss limit, it automatically removes the losses of the connections you used to set the reference. Note For links with MPO modules, each module is one connector. Splices: Enter the number of splices that are in each path of the link. 175 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Jumper Reference: Enter the number of jumpers you will use in each fiber path when you set the reference. The dotted lines in the diagram on the screen show you which parts of the link are included in the test results. See Reference Method on page 173. The dotted lines show you which parts of the link are included in the test results. Connector icons show the connections between the ends of the link. If you enter 7 or more for the Total Connections setting, a number inside of a connector icon shows the number of connectors between the ends of the link. For example, if the Total Connections setting is 7, a connector icon shows the number 5 ( ) The round icon shows the number of splices in each path of the link. To see help for the screen, tap To save your settings, tap DONE. 176 . Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Loss/Length Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Connector or connection = 1 connector pair Connector Splice Connectors included in the test results for the 1 Jumper reference method Connector Connector Reference connections Jumpers: 1 Test connections Total Connections: 3 (do not adjust for the reference method) Splices: 1 GPU133.EPS Figure 25. How to Count the Numbers of Connectors, Splices, and Jumpers 177 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook About 1 Jumper Reference Connections The reference and test connections shown in this manual give 1 jumper results. 1 jumper results include the loss of the fiber plus the loss of the connections at both ends of the link. This is the best method for tests on premises fiber installations. Premises installations typically use patch cords at both ends of the link, and connector loss is a large part of the total loss. If you do not have the correct connector adapters, see Appendix C for other connections that give 1 jumper results. For descriptions of the 2 and 3 jumper reference connections, see Appendix C. Caution Most cable manufacturers will give you a warranty on a fiber installation only if you use a 1 Jumper reference when you certify the installation. Note If you use a 2 Jumper reference, the Wizard for the reference procedure does not show steps for the TRC verification. To save test results for the TRCs, do the tests manually. Autotest in Smart Remote Mode Use Smart Remote mode to do tests on dual-fiber cabling. In this mode, the tester measures loss and length on two fibers at two wavelengths. If you turn on the Bi-Directional function, the tester makes measurements in both directions. Figure 26 shows the equipment for tests in Smart Remote mode. 178 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode B C A D E F G GPU128.EPS Main and remote Versiv units with CertiFiber Pro modules installed Fiber cleaning supplies Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) For multimode fiber: two EF-TRC AC adapters with line cords test reference cords Two singlemode adapters For multimode fiber: two test (optional) reference cords. For singlemode fiber: four test reference cords. Figure 26. Equipment for Autotests in Smart Remote Mode 179 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: Set the Reference in Smart Remote Mode 1-1 Turn on the tester and remote and let them sit for a minimum of 5 minutes. Let them sit longer if they are above or below ambient temperature. 1-2 Make sure that the home screen shows the correct settings for the job, and the test type is Smart Remote. To make sure that other settings are correct, tap the test setup panel, make sure the correct test is selected on the CHANGE TEST screen, then tap EDIT to see more settings. Table 8 on page 172 describes the settings. 1-3 Clean and inspect the connectors on the tester, remote, and test reference cords. 1-4 On the home screen tap SET REF. 1-5 On the SET REFERENCE screen, tap RUN WIZARD. Notes To only set the reference, and not measure the loss of your test reference cords, tap SKIP WIZARD on the SET REFERENCE screen. Fluke Networks recommends that you measure the loss of your test reference cords each time you set the reference. 1-6 Make the connections to set the reference, as shown on the screen and in Figure 27, then tap NEXT to see the completed connections. Notes The SET REFERENCE screen shows reference connections for the selected reference method. Figure 27 shows connections for a 1 Jumper reference. When you set the reference, align the testers as shown in Figure 27 to keep the fibers as straight as possible. 180 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode 1-7 To enter the length of the test reference cords you will add to connect to the link, tap TRC LENGTH on the SET REFERENCE screen. The length you enter does not change the test results. The tester saves the length with the results to meet TIA reporting requirements. 1-8 Tap SET REFERENCE. If you did not use the connection wizard, go to step 3. Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cords You Will Add Caution If you disconnected a test reference cord from the output of the tester or remote, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 2-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the reference procedure is completed, tap NEXT. 2-2 Disconnect the test reference cords from the INPUT ports on the tester and remote, then use test reference cords and adapters to make the connections to verify the TRCs, as shown on the screen and in Figure 27. 2-3 Tap TRC VERIFICATION. The tester measures and saves the loss of the test reference cords you added. The IDs for these results start with “TRC”, show the date and time of the test, and have an for the test result. The tester shows a warning if the loss of a TRC is more than these limits: Maximum loss for multimode TRCs: 0.15 dB Maximum loss for singlemode TRCs: 0.25 dB If the tester shows a warning, clean and inspect the connectors on the TRCs in the path that has too much loss, then set the reference and do the TRC verification again. 181 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Caution Do not disconnect the outputs ( and ) after you set the reference. When you use the EF-TRCs, DO NOT use other mandrels. Test reference cord Fiber link Test reference cord Reference TRC Verification Fiber Link Test *Use the EF-TRCs only with multimode modules. GPU122.EPS Figure 27. Connections for Smart Remote Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) 182 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode Step 3: Do an Autotest in Smart Remote Mode Caution If you disconnected a test reference cord from the output of the tester or remote, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 3-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the set reference or TRC verification procedure is completed, tap NEXT to see how to connect to the link under test. 3-2 Clean and inspect all the connectors. 3-3 Make the connections to do the test on the fiber link, as shown on the screen and in Figure 27, then tap HOME. 3-4 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. If the CHECK FIBER CONNECTIONS screen shows an open fiber: 3-5 Make sure that all connections are good and no fibers have damage. Use the VFL to make sure the fibers in the link have continuity. Make sure that the remote is on. Switch the connections at one end of the patch panel. If you are not sure you are connected to the correct fibers, connect the main tester’s INPUT fiber to different connections until the test continues or the INPUT fiber on the display is green. Then if necessary, connect the remote’s INPUT fiber to different connections until the test continues. If Bi-Directional is On: Halfway through the test, the tester tells you to switch the input and output fibers. See “BiDirectional Tests” on page 206. 183 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 3-6 Save the result: If Auto Save is on, the tester uses the next two IDs to save the results for the two fibers. If Auto Save is off, tap SAVE if the test passed or FIX LATER if the test failed. The SAVE RESULT screen shows the next two IDs available. You can change the IDs if necessary. Autotest Results for Smart Remote Mode Unsaved results show the results for both fibers. See Figures 28 and 29. A B D E B F C G H I GPU118EPS Figure 28. Result for Smart Remote Mode (Unsaved Bi-Directional Results Shown) 184 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode The overall result for the Autotest. The fiber IDs and the loss and length measurements for the fibers: The result exceeds the limit. The result is within the limit. The selected test limit does not have a limit for the test. To see the results, limits, and margins for a fiber, tap the window. See Figure 29. The settings the tester used for the test. The dashed lines are around the connectors and fiber that are included in the loss and length results. Gray connectors and fibers are not included because you used them to set the reference. Connector icons show the number you entered for the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen (Figure 24 on page 175). For Figure 28, the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting is 4. The round icon shows the number of splices entered for the SPLICES setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen. Bi-directional results show the fibers crossed at the main and remote ports. The fibers show the connections as they are at the end of the test. To see help for the screen, tap . When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. 185 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B C D K E J F G H I GPU146.EPS Figure 29. Detailed Result for Smart Remote Mode (Unsaved Bi-Directional Results Shown) The fiber that gave the results. INPUT and OUTPUT refer to the connector on the main tester where the fiber was connected at the end of the test. The Test Type and Test Limit used for the test. The wavelengths the tester used for the test. LOSS: Measurements of loss for each wavelength the tester used. The measurement is red if it exceeds the limit. 186 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode LIMIT: The maximum loss allowed by the selected test limit for each wavelength the tester used. MARGIN: The difference between the limit and the measured loss for each wavelength the tester used. Margin is negative if the loss exceeds the limit. Tap to see help for this screen. If the results include warnings, tap to see the warnings. VIEW REFERENCE: Tap this button to see the reference values and the date and time the reference was set. SETTINGS: Tap this button to see the TEST SETUP settings used for the test. LENGTH: This tab shows the length of the fiber, the maximum length allowed by the test limit, and the margin for the length measurement. If the distance to the end of the fiber does not agree at all wavelengths, this tab shows the longest length. Note The length of each fiber is half of the total length of both fibers. MAIN>REMOTE/REMOTE>MAIN: If you did a bi-directional test, the tabs show the results for each direction for the second half of the test. Uni-directional results show only the MAIN>REMOTE tab. Note The directions Main>Remote (main to remote) and Remote>Main (remote to main) in the bidirectional results are only the directions of the optical signals for the second half of the test. If a fiber fails, the direction does not tell you the location of the problem. 187 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Fiber IDs for Saved Results in Smart Remote Mode If Auto Save is On and the test passed, the tester saves two records, one for each fiber. The records have the next two IDs in the ID list. If you must change the ID for a fiber before you save results, set Auto Save to Off before you do the test. Then, on the SAVE RESULT screen, tap the Input Fiber ID or Output Fiber ID window. Figure 30 shows unsaved and saved results for bi-directional and uni-directional results. 188 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Smart Remote Mode Uni-Directional Results Unsaved uni-directional result Saved uni-directional result for the input fiber Saved uni-directional result for the output fiber Bi-Directional Results Unsaved bi-directional result. Saved bi-directional result Saved bi-directional for the output fiber. result for the input fiber Fiber 01-B-B-00 was connected to the INPUT port at the start of the test GPU145.EPS Figure 30. Unsaved and Saved Result for Smart Remote Mode 189 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Autotest in Loopback Mode Use Loopback mode to do tests on spools of cable and segments of uninstalled cable. In this mode, the tester measures loss and length at two wavelengths. If you turn on the Bi-Directional function, the tester makes measurements in both directions. Figure 26 shows the equipment for tests in Loopback Mode. 190 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Loopback Mode B C A D E F G GPU1129EPS Main Versiv unit with CertiFiber Pro module installed For multimode fiber: one EF-TRC test reference cord Two singlemode adapters For multimode fiber: one test Fiber cleaning supplies Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) AC adapters with line cords (optional) reference cord. For singlemode fiber: two test reference cords. Figure 31. Equipment for Autotests in Loopback Mode 191 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: Set the Reference in Loopback Mode 1-1 Turn on the tester and let it sit for a minimum of 5 minutes. Let it sit longer if it is above or below ambient temperature. 1-2 Make sure that the home screen shows the correct settings for the job, and the test type is Loopback. To make sure that other settings are correct, tap the test setup panel, make sure the correct test is selected on the CHANGE TEST screen, then tap EDIT to see more settings. Table 8 on page 172 describes the settings. 1-3 Clean and inspect the connectors on the tester and test reference cords. 1-4 On the home screen tap SET REF. 1-5 On the SET REFERENCE screen, tap RUN WIZARD. Notes To only set the reference, and not measure the loss of your test reference cord, tap SKIP WIZARD on the SET REFERENCE screen. Fluke Networks recommends that you measure the loss of your test reference cord each time you set the reference. 1-6 Make the connection to set the reference, as shown on the screen, then tap NEXT to see the completed connections. Figure 32 also shows the completed connections. Notes The SET REFERENCE screen shows reference connections for the selected reference method. Figure 32 shows connections for the 1 Jumper reference. When you set the reference, keep the fiber as straight as possible. -continued- 192 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Loopback Mode Caution Do not disconnect the output ( ) after you set the reference. Fiber When you use the EF-TRCs, DO NOT use other mandrels. Test reference cord Reference TRC Verification Fiber Test *Use the EF-TRCs only with multimode modules. GPU131.EPS Figure 32. Connections for Loopback Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) 193 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 1-7 To enter the length of the test reference cord you will add to connect to the fiber under test, tap TRC LENGTH on the SET REFERENCE screen. The length you enter does not change the test results. The tester saves the length with the results to meet TIA reporting requirements. 1-8 Tap SET REFERENCE. 1-9 If you did not use the connection wizard, go to step 3. Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cord You Will Add Caution If you disconnected the test reference cord from the output of the tester, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 2-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the reference procedure is completed, tap NEXT. 2-2 Disconnect the test reference cord from the INPUT port on the tester, then use a test reference cord and adapter to make the connections to verify the TRCs, as shown on the screen and in Figure 32. 2-3 Tap TRC VERIFICATION. The tester measures and saves the loss of the test reference cord you added. The ID for this result starts with “TRC”, shows the date and time of the test, and has an for the test result. The tester shows a warning if the loss of a TRC is more than these limits: Maximum loss for multimode TRCs: 0.15 dB Maximum loss for singlemode TRCs: 0.25 dB If the tester shows a warning, clean and inspect the connectors on the TRC, then set the reference and do the TRC verification again. 194 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Loopback Mode Step 3: Do an Autotest in Loopback Mode Caution If you disconnected the test reference cord from the output of the tester, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 3-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the set reference or TRC verification procedure is completed, tap NEXT to see how to connect to the fiber under test. 3-2 Clean and inspect the connectors on the fiber under test. 3-3 Make the connections to do the test on the fiber, as shown on the screen and in Figure 32, then tap HOME. 3-4 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. If the CHECK FIBER CONNECTIONS screen shows an open fiber: Make sure that all connections are good and no fibers have damage. Use the VFL to make sure the fiber under test has continuity. If you are connected to fibers at a patch panel that are connected together at the far end, and you are not sure you are connected to the correct fibers, connect the main tester’s INPUT fiber to different connections until the test continues. 3-5 If Bi-Directional is On: Halfway through the test, the tester tells you to switch the input and output fibers. See “BiDirectional Tests” on page 206. 3-6 If Auto Save is on, the tester uses the next ID to save the results. If Auto Save is off, the SAVE RESULT screen shows the next ID available. You can change the ID if necessary. 195 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Autotest Results for Loopback Mode Figure 33 shows an example of Autotest results for Loopback mode. A D E B F C G H GPU119.EPS Figure 33. Result for Loopback Mode The overall result for the Autotest. The loss and length measurements for the fiber: The result exceeds the limit. The result is within the limit. The selected test limit does not have a limit for the test. 196 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Loopback Mode To see the results, limits, and margins for the fiber, tap the window. The settings the tester used for the test. The dashed lines are around the connectors and fiber that are included in the loss and length results. Gray connectors and fibers are not included because you used them to set the reference. Connector icons show the number you entered for the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen (Figure 24 on page 175). For Figure 33, the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting is 3. The round icon shows the number of splices entered for the SPLICES setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen. To see help for the screen, tap . When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. 197 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Autotest in Far End Source Mode Use Far End Source mode to measure loss at two wavelengths on one fiber. In this mode, you can use the CertiFiber Pro remote or another source, such as the Fluke Networks SimpliFiber® Pro source, at the far end of the fiber. Caution For Far End Source mode, use the EF-TRC cords only with the CertiFiber Pro modules or with sources approved by Fluke Networks for use with the cords. If a source does not have the correct LED and internal fibers, the EF-TRC cords will not make launch conditions that comply with encircled flux standards. If the source is not approved, use a standard mandrel. Figure 34 shows the equipment for tests in Far End Source mode. Auto Wavelength Modes CertiFiber Pro modules and SimpliFiber Pro sources have an auto wavelength mode. In this mode, the output port transmits both wavelengths (850 nm and 1300 nm or 1310 nm and 1550 nm). The signal includes identifiers that tell the meter when to measure power at each wavelength. The CertiFiber Pro module in the remote always operates in auto wavelength mode. To select Auto CertiFiber Pro or Auto SimpliFiber Pro mode, you tap the setting when the tester shows the TEST MODE window. The TEST MODE window shows each time you set the reference. 198 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Far End Source Mode B C A D E F G GPU130.EPS Main and remote Versiv units with CertiFiber Pro modules installed Fiber cleaning supplies Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) For multimode fiber: one EF-TRC AC adapters with line cords test reference cord One singlemode adapter For multimode fiber: one test (optional) reference cord. For singlemode fiber: two test reference cords. Figure 34. Equipment for Autotests in Far End Source Mode 199 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: Set the Reference in Far End Source Mode 1-1 Turn on the tester and source let them sit for a minimum of 5 minutes. Let them sit longer if they are above or below ambient temperature, or if the instructions for the source specify a longer time. 1-2 Make sure that the home screen shows the correct settings for the job, and the test type is Far End Source. To make sure that other settings are correct, tap the test setup panel, make sure the correct test is selected on the CHANGE TEST screen, then tap EDIT to see more settings. Table 8 on page 172 describes the settings. 1-3 Clean and inspect the connectors on the tester, source, and test reference cords. 1-4 On the home screen tap SET REF. 1-5 In the TEST MODE window, select Auto CertiFiber Pro or the type of source you will use, then tap DONE. 1-6 On the SET REFERENCE screen, tap RUN WIZARD. Notes To only set the reference, and not measure the loss of your test reference cord, tap SKIP WIZARD on the SET REFERENCE screen. Fluke Networks recommends that you measure the loss of your test reference cord each time you set the reference. 1-7 200 Make the connections to set the reference as shown on the screen, then tap NEXT to see the completed connections. Figure 35 also shows the completed connections. Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Far End Source Mode Notes The SET REFERENCE screen shows reference connections for the selected reference method. Figure 35 shows connections for the 1 Jumper reference. When you set the reference, keep the fiber as straight as possible. 1-8 Turn on the optical source. On the CertiFiber Pro remote module, hold down the button adjacent to the VFL port for 3 seconds to turn on the multimode source. On CFP-QUAD modules, to turn on the singlemode source, press the button again. Note The CertiFiber Pro module in the remote always operates in auto wavelength mode. The output port transmits both wavelengths (850 nm and 1300 nm or 1310 nm and 1550 nm). The signal includes identifiers that tell the main tester when to measure power at each wavelength. 1-9 To enter the length of the test reference cord you will add to connect to the fiber under test, tap TRC LENGTH on the SET REFERENCE screen. The length you enter does not change the test results. The tester saves the length with the results to meet TIA reporting requirements. 1-10 Tap SET REFERENCE. 1-11 If you did not use the connection wizard, go to step 3. 201 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Caution Do not disconnect the output ( ) after you set the reference. When you use the EF-TRCs, DO NOT use other mandrels. EF-TRC* EF-TRC* EF-TRC* Fiber Test reference cord Reference TRC Verification Fiber Test *Use the EF-TRCs only with multimode modules. GPU132.EPS Figure 35. Connections for Far End Source Mode (1 Jumper Reference, Multimode Fiber) 202 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Far End Source Mode Step 2: Measure the Loss of the Test Reference Cord You Will Add Caution If you disconnected the test reference cord from the output of the tester, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 2-1 On the SET REFERENCE screen, when the reference procedure is completed, tap NEXT. 2-2 Disconnect the test reference cord from the INPUT port on the tester, then use a test reference cord and adapter to make the connections to verify the TRCs, as shown on the screen and in Figure 35. 2-3 Tap TRC VERIFICATION. The tester measures and saves the loss of the test reference cord you added. The ID for this result starts with “TRC”, shows the date and time of the test, and has an for the test result. The tester shows a warning if the loss of a TRC is more than these limits: Maximum loss for multimode TRCs: 0.15 dB Maximum loss for singlemode TRCs: 0.25 dB If the tester shows a warning, clean and inspect the connectors on the TRC, then set the reference and do the TRC verification again. 203 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 3: Do an Autotest in Far End Source Mode Caution If you disconnected the test reference cord from the output of the tester, you must set the reference again to make sure your measurements are reliable. 3-1 On the SET REFERENCE, when the set reference or TRC verification procedure is completed, tap NEXT to see how to connect to the fiber under test. 3-2 Clean and inspect the all connectors. 3-3 Make the connections to do the test on the fiber, as shown on the screen and in Figure 35, then tap HOME. 3-4 If necessary, select End 1 or End 2. On the home screen, tap the Next ID: panel, then tap the End 1/End 2 control to select an end. 3-5 Tap TEST on the main tester or press on the main or remote tester. 3-6 If the CHECK FIBER CONNECTIONS screen shows an open fiber: 3-7 Make sure that all connections are good and no fibers have damage. Use the VFL to make sure the fiber under test has continuity. If you are connected to a fiber at a patch panel, and you are not sure you are connected to the correct fiber, connect the main tester’s INPUT fiber to different connections until the test continues. If Auto Save is on, the tester uses the next ID to save the results. If Auto Save is off, the SAVE RESULT screen shows the next ID available. You can change the ID if necessary. Note To put End 1/End 2 results together in the same record, use LinkWare software to merge the results. 204 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Autotest in Far End Source Mode Autotest Results for Far End Source Mode Figure 36 shows an example of Autotest results for Far End Source mode. A B D E F C G H GPU120.EPS Figure 36. Result for Far End Source Mode The overall result for the Autotest. The loss and length measurements for the fiber: The result exceeds the limit. The result is within the limit. The selected test limit does not have a limit for the test. (see the note on the next page) To see the results, limit, and margins for the fiber, tap the window. 205 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Note The Autotest in Far End Source mode does not show a PASS/FAIL result, limit, or margin if the selected test limit uses fiber length to calculate loss. An example of such a limit is the TIA-568C Fiber Backbone limit. The tester does not measure length in Far End Source mode. The settings the tester used for the test. The dashed lines are around the connectors and fiber that are included in the loss and length results. Gray connectors and fibers are not included because you used them to set the reference. Connector icons show the number you entered for the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen (Figure 24 on page 175). For Figure 36, the TOTAL CONNECTIONS setting is 1. The round icon shows the number of splices entered for the SPLICES setting on the No. of Connectors/Splices screen. To see help for the screen, tap . When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. Bi-Directional Tests A connector or splice can have a different loss when you measure from the other end of the fiber. Thus, some manufacturers of fiber cable and components will not give you warranty support unless you do bi-directional tests. Do bi-directional tests when they are required by the manufacturer or by your customer. The tester can automatically do bi-directional tests in Smart Remote and Loopback modes. To get bi-directional results in Far End Source mode, do a test from each end of the fiber. 206 Chapter 7: How to Certify Fiber Cabling Bi-Directional Tests In Smart Remote mode, the tester saves bi-directional results in two records. Each record contains the results for one fiber for both directions. To do a bi-directional test Note When you make connections for a bi-directional test in Smart Remote mode, connect the fiber that has the Input Fiber ID to the main tester’s OUTPUT port, and the fiber that has the Output Fiber ID to the main tester’s INPUT port. Halfway through the test, you will switch the connections. 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel, make sure the correct test is selected on the CHANGE TEST screen, then tap EDIT. 2 On the TEST SETUP screen, in the Bi-Directional panel, tap the control to make it show On, then tap SAVE. 3 Do an Autotest. 4 Halfway through the test, the tester tells you to switch the input and output fibers. Caution Switch the connections at both ends of the patch panel or fiber under test, not at the tester's and remote’s ports. If you disconnect a test reference cord from an output port on the tester or remote, the reference value will be unreliable. Note The directions Main>Remote (main to remote) and Remote>Main (remote to main) in the bidirectional results are only the directions of the optical signals for the second half of the test. If a fiber fails, the direction does not tell you the location of the problem. -continued- 207 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 5 If Auto Save is on and the tester is in Smart Remote mode, the tester uses the next two IDs to save the results for the two fibers. If Auto Save is off, the SAVE RESULT screen shows the next two IDs available. You can change the IDs if necessary. How to Use the Talk Function If you have two testers and two CertiFiber Pro OLTS modules, you can use the talk function to talk to the person at the other end of a duplex fiber link. Note The talk mode does not operate during tests. To use the talk function 1 Connect the main and remote testers together through a duplex fiber link. 2 Connect headsets to the headset jacks on the testers (see Figure 19 on page 156). 3 Press the button on one of the headset microphones or press on the remote tester, then speak into the microphone. When the talk function is on, shows at the top of the screen on the main tester. On the remote tester, the TALK LED is on. 4 To adjust the volume at the main tester, press the button on the headset’s microphone as necessary, or move the slider control in the Talk Enabled window. To adjust the volume at the remote tester, press or the button on the headset’s microphone as necessary. The LEDs on the remote show the volume level. 5 208 To turn off the talk function, hold down the button on one of the headsets or hold down on the remote tester. Chapter 8: The Power Meter and Light Source You can use the CertiFiber Pro main tester to monitor and save measurements of optical power and loss, and you can use the main or remote tester and as an optical power source. You can use the main tester’s power or loss meter and its light source at the same time. How to Monitor Power and Loss The power meter lets you monitor the optical power supplied by a source such as an optical network interface card or optical test equipment. You can do these tasks: Monitor minimum and maximum power levels in dBm (decibels per milliwatt), mW (milliwatts), µW (microwatts), or nW (nanowatts. Monitor power loss compared to a reference level. Auto CertiFiber Pro and Auto SimpliFiber Pro modes let you monitor power and loss at two wavelengths when you use a CertiFiber™ Pro or SimpliFiber® Pro source. Save power and loss measurements for two wavelengths in one record. Figure 37 shows the equipment for meter measurements. Notes It is not necessary to select a Fiber Type or Test Limit when you monitor power or loss. These tests do not have PASS/FAIL results. Power and loss measurements from sources that transmit network data can change as the data rate changes. 209 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook D A B C E GPU137EPS Main Versiv main unit CertiFiber Video probe with USB connector Pro module installed One test reference cord Fiber cleaning supplies (DI-1000 shown) AC adapter with line cords (optional) Figure 37. Equipment for Power Meter Measurements To monitor power 1 Clean and inspect the tester’s input port and the connectors on the source and test reference cord. 2 Connect the tester to the source, as shown in Figure 38. 3 Turn on the source. On a CertiFiber Pro module, hold down the button adjacent to the VFL port for 3 seconds. 4 On the home screen, tap TOOLS, then tap Power Meter / Light Source. 5 The default mode for the power meter is Auto CertiFiber Pro. If the source is not a CertiFiber Pro tester, tap to select the correct mode. Figure 39 shows the power meter and its controls. 210 Chapter 8: The Power Meter and Light Source How to Monitor Power and Loss Optical network interface card or optical power source Power at the end of a link Power from an optical source Figure 38. Connections to Monitor Power and Loss GPU138.EPS To monitor loss On the POWER METER / LIGHT SOURCE screen, tap REF to use the present power level as a reference. The meters show the difference between the reference power levels and the measured power levels. To save the power and loss measurements 1 On the POWER METER / LIGHT SOURCE screen, tap SAVE. 2 On the SAVE RESULT screen, select End 1 or End 2, make sure the Cable ID and End name are correct, then tap SAVE. Saved power meter results show these icons for End 1 and End 2: The tester saves the present, minimum, maximum, and reference power and loss measurements for both wavelengths in one record. 211 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A G B C D E F H Power measurements I G C J E F H Loss measurements Figure 39. Power Meter Measurements and Controls GPU126.EPS The meters show the power levels received on the input port. This control shows when the meters measure absolute power. Tap the control to see the power measurement in dBm (decibels per milliwatt), mW (milliwatts), µW (microwatts), or nW (nanowatts. 212 Chapter 8: The Power Meter and Light Source How to Control the Light Source To select a wavelength for the power meter, tap . Use the Auto CertiFiber Pro and Auto SimpliFiber Pro modes only with a CertiFiber Pro or SimpliFiber Pro source. In these modes, the tester reads the wavelength identifiers transmitted by the source to know when to measure power at each wavelength. To monitor power loss (), tap LOSS or REF. When you tap REF, the tester saves the present measurements as reference levels and the meters show power loss (). To save the power and loss measurements, tap SAVE. To see the present, minimum, maximum, and reference power levels, tap a meter. To set the minimum and maximum values to zero, tap CLEAR MIN/MAX in the Min/Max/Ref window. When you tap LOSS (), the meters show power loss. The loss is the difference between the reference power levels and the measured power levels. To monitor absolute power, tap POWER. How to Control the Light Source When you do tests in Far End Source mode, you use the button on the module to turn on the remote’s light source manually. You can also turn on the main tester’s light source manually and use the main tester as an optical source. 213 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Use the Display to Control the Main Tester’s Light Source 1 Clean and inspect all connectors you will use. 2 Connect the tester’s output port to the power meter. If your tester has a CertiFiber Pro Quad module installed, make sure you connect the fiber to the correct output port. 3 On the home screen tap TOOLS, tap Power Meter / Light Source, then select settings for the source. See Figure 40. Use the Module’s Button to Control the Light Source The button next to the VFL port puts the output port in auto wavelength mode. In this mode, the port transmits both wavelengths (850 nm and 1300 nm or 1310 nm and 1550 nm). The signal includes identifiers that tell the meter when to measure power at each wavelength. Use this mode only with a CertiFiber Pro or SimpliFiber Pro power meter. Note The remote source always operates in auto wavelength mode. 1 Clean and inspect all connectors you will use. 2 Connect the tester’s output port to the power meter. If your tester has a CertiFiber Pro Quad module installed, make sure you connect the fiber to the correct output port. 3 Hold down the button adjacent to the VFL port for 3 seconds. On CertiFiber Pro Quad modules, to turn on the singlemode source, press the button again. On a main tester used as a source, you can use the POWER METER / LIGHT SOURCE screen to select different settings for the source. See Figure 40. 214 Chapter 8: The Power Meter and Light Source How to Control the Light Source A B C Figure 40. Light Source Controls for the Main Tester GPU127.EPS Use the buttons to control the output port when you use the main tester as a light source: Auto: In this mode, the output port transmits both wavelengths. The signal includes identifiers that tell a CertiFiber Pro or SimpliFiber Pro power meter when to measure power at each wavelength. Use this mode only with a CertiFiber Pro or SimpliFiber Pro power meter. Off: The output port does not transmit the selected wavelength. CW: The output port transmits a continuous signal at one wavelength. Use this mode if the power meter is not a CertiFiber Pro or SimpliFiber Pro meter. The laser icon is red when the output port transmits the wavelength adjacent to the icon. When the tester has a CertiFiber Pro Quad module installed, use this control to select multimode or singlemode wavelengths 215 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 216 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Overview of the OTDR Module Warning Before you use the OTDR module, read the safety information that starts on page 2. The OptiFiber® Pro OTDR modules are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers that locate, identify, and measure reflective and loss events in multimode and singlemode fibers. Typical maximum test ranges are 35 km maximum at 1300 nm for multimode fiber and 130 km maximum at 1550 nm for singlemode fiber. The modules includes these features: Automatic analysis of OTDR traces and events helps you identify and locate faults on multimode (850 nm and 1300 nm; 50 µm and 62.5 µm) and singlemode (1310 nm and 1550 nm) fiber. Shows OTDR results as an intuitive map of events, a table of events, and an OTDR trace. “Document Only” test limit is available if PASS/FAIL results are not necessary. DataCenter OTDR™ test gives optimal performance when you do tests on fiber installations that have short links, many connections, and possibly large reflections. FaultMap™ test lets you make maps of your cable plant, see patch cords as short as 0.5 m, and see events that have poor reflectance. Visual fault locator helps you verify the continuity of fibers and locate faults in fibers and connectors. Optional video probe lets you inspect fiber endfaces and save the images in test reports. 217 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The Versiv tester saves approximately 2000 OTDR tests on fiber links with an average length of 2 km, and up to 5000 tests for lengths less than 2 km. OptiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs B C D E A N M L K J I F G H GPU06.EPS Figure 41. Main Versiv Unit with OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module (OptiFiber Pro Quad module shown) 218 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OptiFiber Pro Connectors, Keys, and LEDs LCD display with touchscreen. Singlemode OTDR port with interchangeable SC adapter and protective cap. The LED in front of the port turns on when the port emits an optical signal. Multimode OTDR port with interchangeable SC adapter and protective cap. The LED in front of the port turns on when the port emits an optical signal. Visual fault locator port and protective cap. The LED in front of the port turns on when the port emits an optical signal. Warning Do not look directly into optical connectors. Some sources emit invisible radiation that can cause permanent damage your eyes. Button that controls the VFL. Micro-AB USB port: This USB port lets you connect the tester to a PC so you can upload test results to the PC and install software updates in the tester. Type A USB port: This USB host port lets you save test results on a USB flash drive or connect a video probe to the tester. Headset jack. : Starts a test. To start a test, you can also tap TEST on the display. : Power key. : Press to go to the home screen. Connector for the ac adapter. The LED is red when the battery charges, and green when the battery is fully charged. The LED is yellow if the battery will not charge. See “Charge the Battery” on page13. RJ45 connector: For functions available in future software releases. 219 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Decal with laser safety information: The Home Screen for OptiFiber Pro Modules The home screen (Figure 42) shows important test settings. Before you do a test, make sure these settings are correct. J A B C I D E F G H GPU02.EPS Figure 42. The HOME Screen for OptiFiber Pro Modules 220 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module The Home Screen for OptiFiber Pro Modules PROJECT: The project contains the settings for a job and helps you monitor the status of a job. When you save test results, the tester puts them in the project. Tap the PROJECT panel to edit the project settings, select a different project, or make a new project. Shows a summary of the test results in the project: : The number of tests that passed. : The number of tests that failed. The test setup panel shows the settings the tester will use when you tap TEST or press . To change these settings, tap the panel. Note You can set up tests for any module that the tester can use, even when no module is attached. Next ID: The Next ID panel shows the ID that the tester gives to the next test results you save. Tap Next ID to do these tasks: Enter an ID, select a different ID in the ID set, select a different set of IDs, or make a new set. The tester adds the IDs and ID sets you make to the project that shows on the home screen. Turn Auto Save on or off. Select End 1 or End 2 for OTDR and FiberInspector tests. Enter a name for End 1 and End 2. Operator: The name of the person who does the job. You can enter a maximum of 20 operator names. TOOLS: The TOOLS menu lets you set up the compensation function for the launch/tail cords, use tools such as the real-time trace and the FiberInspector test, see the status of the tester, and set user preferences such as the language and the display brightness. 221 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook RESULTS: Tap RESULTS to see and manage the results that are saved in the tester. TEST: Tap TEST to do the test shown in the test setup panel. The percentage of the tests in the project that are completed. The tester uses the number of available IDs and the tests you selected on the CABLE ID SETUP screen to calculate this percentage. See Figure 71 on page 318. % Tested does not show if your project contains only a Next ID list. See “About Next ID Sets” on page 339 for more information about the Next ID list. The type of module attached to the tester. Settings for OTDR Tests Table 9 gives descriptions of the settings for OTDR tests. To set up a project, which includes the settings in Table 9, cable IDs, and operator names, see Chapter 14. To set up an OTDR test 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap an OTDR test to change, then tap EDIT. Or to set up a new OTDR test, tap NEW TEST. 222 If no module is installed, the MODULE screen shows. Tap the correct OptiFiber Pro module. Then on the TEST TYPE screen, tap a test. If the correct module does not show on the TEST SETUP screen, tap Module, then on the MODULE screen tap the correct OptiFiber Pro module. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap the panels to change settings for the test. See Table 9. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE when your test setup is completed. 5 On the CHANGE TEST screen, make sure the button next to the test is selected, then tap USE SELECTED. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Settings for OTDR Tests Table 9. Settings for OTDR Tests Module Select the OptiFiber Pro module you will use. To select a different module, tap the Module panel on the TEST SETUP screen, then tap a module. Test Type When you turn on the tester, the Test Type shows the test that was last selected. Auto OTDR: The tester automatically selects settings that give you the best view of the events on the cabling. This mode is the easiest to use and is the best choice for most applications. To see the settings the tester used for an Auto OTDR test, tap SETTINGS on the trace screen. Note Some unusual faults can cause the Auto OTDR test to show an unsatisfactory trace. If this occurs, use the Manual OTDR test to get a better trace. Manual OTDR: This mode lets you select settings to control the qualities of the trace. See “Manual OTDR Mode” on page 270 for details. DataCenter OTDR: This test is optimized for fiber installations that have short links, many connections, and the possibility of large reflections. Notes By default, the DataCenter OTDR test uses 850 nm for multimode fiber and 1310 nm for singlemode fiber. These are the wavelengths typically used in data centers. You can select other wavelengths if necessary. You must use launch compensation when you do a DataCenter OTDR test. Manual OTDR Settings This item shows only if you select Manual OTDR for the Test Type. See Table 12 on page 271. Manual OTDR mode lets you select settings to control the qualities of the trace. Launch Compensation Tap the control to turn the launch compensation function on or off. See“About Launch and Tail Cords” on page 226. (continued) 223 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 9. Settings for OTDR Tests (continued) Wavelength Select the wavelengths you want to use. You can do tests at one or all of the wavelengths supported by the module you selected. Fiber Type Select a fiber type that is correct for the type you will test. To see a different group of fiber types, tap MORE, then tap a group. To make a custom fiber type, see Chapter 15. Note Select a fiber type before you select a test limit and wavelengths. The tester shows only the test limits and wavelengths that are applicable to the selected fiber type. Fiber Type Settings IOR: The tester uses the index of refraction to calculate the optical length of the fiber. Optical length usually differs slightly from the length of the fiber jackets in a link. This occurs because fibers are often curved inside their jackets and because there are small variations in the IOR of the fibers. Each fiber type includes a default value, which is the IOR specified for the fiber by the manufacturer. To use a different IOR, make a custom fiber type. See Chapter 15. Note If you use a length-based test limit, the IOR value has an effect on the loss limit that the tester calculates. See “OTDR Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit” on page 225. Backscatter: Backscatter is the backscatter coefficient. This is a measurement of the quantity of light that the fiber reflects back to the OTDR when the OTDR uses a 1 ns pulse. The tester uses this value to calculate the reflectance of events for OTDR tests and the overall ORL for the link. Each fiber type includes a default value, which is the backscatter coefficient specified for the fiber by the manufacturer. To use a different backscatter value, make a custom fiber type. See Chapter 15. 224 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Table 9. Settings for OTDR Tests (continued) Test Limit Select the correct test limit for the job. Generic limits, such as General Fiber and Document Only, let you do tests when no industry-standard limit is applicable and you do not want to make a custom limit. These limits are in the Miscellaneous group. To see a different group of limits, tap MORE, then tap the name of a group. To make a custom test limit, see Chapter 15. Some test limits use the measured length of the fiber to calculate a limit for loss. See “OTDR Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit” on page 225. Test Limit Settings This item shows only if the selected test limit calculates a loss limit for each link. For such limits, enter the number of connectors and splices in the link. See Table 10 on page 226. OTDR Settings for Limits that Calculate a Loss Limit Some test limits do not specify a limit for loss measurements. They specify maximum values of loss per kilometer of fiber and for the connectors and splices in the link. Then, the tester uses the measured length of the link, the number of connectors in the link, and the number of splices in the link to calculate a loss limit for that link. When you select such a limit, you must enter the number of connectors and splices that are in the link. To enter these values, tap Test Limit Settings on the TEST SETUP screen. See Table 10. Note Test Limit Settings shows on the TEST SETUP screen only if the selected test limit calculates a loss limit for each link. For example, Test Limit Settings shows when you select the limit ISO/IEC 14763-3. 225 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 10. Settings for Test Limits that Use Length to Calculate a Loss Limit Number of Connectors Enter the number of connectors that are in the link. If you do not use launch and tail cords, do not include the first and last connectors. If you use only a launch cord, include the first connector, but not the last connector. Number of Splices Enter the number of splices that are in the link. About Launch and Tail Cords Launch and tail cords let the tester measure the loss and reflectance of the first and last connectors in the cabling and also include them in the measurement of overall loss. Without launch and tail cords, no backscatter is available before the first connector nor after the last. To measure the properties of a connector, the tester must measure the backscatter before and after the connector. Fluke Networks recommends that you use launch and tail cords. You should also use the launch/tail cord compensation function to remove the lengths of these fibers from the OTDR measurements. If you select a test limit that requires you to use launch and tail cords, the tester shows a warning message when you try to do an OTDR test without launch and tail cords. Caution For tests on cabling that has angled physical contact (APC) connectors, use only launch/tail cords that have APC connectors at the ends connected to the cabling. Other connector types cause large reflections that can cause unreliable test results. 226 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module About Launch and Tail Cords Caution To help make sure the tester can find the Tail event when you do tests on fibers with APC connectors, use a tail cord that is terminated with a non-APC connector at the far end. Note Do not use hybrid patch cords to connect the launch or tail cords to the cabling under test. Use launch and tail cords with the correct connectors to connect directly to the cabling under test. This gives the best measurement of the first and last connectors in the link. Launch and tail cords with different types of connectors are available from Fluke Networks. How To Compensate for Launch and Tail Cords The launch compensation function lets you specify the lengths of the launch and tail cords. The OTDR can then remove the losses, lengths, and attenuation coefficients of the launch and tail cords from overall OTDR results. It does not remove the losses of the connections at the launch and tail cords. Launch compensation also gives a more accurate ORL (optical return loss) measurement if you entered the correct backscatter coefficient for the fiber you will test. Methods of Launch Compensation The tester has four methods of compensation: Launch Only: Does an OTDR test to find the end of the launch cord. Launch + Tail: Does an OTDR test to find the ends of the launch cord and tail cords. Launch + Fiber + Tail: Use this method for links that have different connectors on the near and far ends of the fiber. 227 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Manual Entry: Lets you enter the lengths of the launch and tail cords without doing an OTDR test to find the ends of the cords. Note Launch + Tail compensation usually gives the most accurate measurements. About Launch/Tail Cords with Low-Reflectance Connectors The tester possibly will not find the correct launch and tail events when you use launch/tail cords that have connectors with low reflectance. This can occur with APC connectors. If this occurs, enter the lengths of the cords manually. See “How To Enter Lengths Manually” on page 233. How to Set Up the Launch Compensation Function 228 1 Select launch and tail cords that have the same type of fiber as the fiber you will test. 2 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. On the CHANGE TEST screen, select an OTDR test to change, then tap EDIT. Or to set up a new OTDR test, tap NEW TEST then tap Auto OTDR, Manual OTDR, or DataCenter OTDR. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap the Launch Compensation control to set it to On. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, make sure the Fiber Type is correct. Change it if necessary. 5 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. 6 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Set Launch Compensation. 7 On the SET LAUNCH METHOD screen tap the type of compensation you want to do. For descriptions of the methods, see “Methods of Launch Compensation” on page 227. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module About Launch and Tail Cords 8 Clean and inspect the OTDR port and the launch/tail cord connectors. 9 Make the connections for the type of compensation you selected, as shown on the SET LAUNCH METHOD screen. See Figures 43, 44, and 45. 10 Tap SET. 11 When the SET LAUNCH COMP screen shows, select the event or events that are the end of the launch cord and the start of the tail cord (if you used a tail cord). When you do Launch + Tail compensation, the end of the launch cord and the start of the tail cord are the same event. See Figure 46. 12 Tap SAVE. Figure 58 shows an example of an OTDR trace with launch and tail markers enabled. Note If you change the launch or tail cord, do the compensation procedure again. Launch cord Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU29.EPS Figure 43. Connections for Launch Only Compensation 229 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Adapter Tail cord Launch cord Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU27.EPS Figure 44. Connections for Launch + Tail Compensation 230 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module About Launch and Tail Cords Tail cord Fiber link Launch cord Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU04.EPS Figure 45. Connections for Launch + Fiber + Tail Compensation 231 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook B A C D E GPU23.EPS Figure 46. SET LAUNCH COMP Screen The distance to the event. The type of event. The tester shows events that are approximately 100 m to 130 m from each end of the fiber as the Launch event and Tail event. Select one event in the Launch column and one event in the Tail column to be the launch and tail events. : When the tester finds other events, it shows gray buttons for events that you cannot select as a launch or tail event. For example, all events after the Launch + Tail event have gray buttons in the Launch column, and all events before that have gray buttons in Tail column. 232 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module About Launch and Tail Cords To see the OTDR trace for the events on this screen, tap View Trace. Tap SAVE to save your settings. How To Enter Lengths Manually When you use launch and tail cords that have APC connectors, it is possible that the tester will not find the connectors when you try to set up the launch compensation function. If this occurs, enter the lengths of the launch and tail cords manually. You can also use the manual-entry method when you do not have an adapter to connect the launch and tail cords together. To enter the launch and tail cord lengths manually 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Set Launch Compensation. Note Set Launch Compensation shows on the TOOLS menu only when an OTDR module is installed. 2 Tap Manual Entry, then tap SET. 3 Tap Launch Cord, use the keyboard to enter the length of the launch cord, then tap DONE. Note You cannot enter a length less than 120.0 m (393.7 ft) for a singlemode launch cord and 90 m (295 ft) for a multimode launch cord. 4 If you will use a tail cord, tap Tail Cord, use the keyboard to enter the length of the tail cord, then tap DONE. How To See the Launch Compensation Settings 1 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Set Launch Compensation. 2 The SET LAUNCH METHOD screen shows the launch compensation settings. 233 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook About the Launch Events that the Tester Adds to OTDR Results If launch compensation is on, and the tester does not find a launch event when you do an OTDR test, the tester adds one at the location specified in the launch compensation settings. This function lets you use launch cords that have low-reflectance connectors, such as APC connectors, at the end you connect to the link. Because these connectors make very small reflections or show as loss events, the tester possibly will not find the launch event when you use such cords. Note This feature also makes a launch event show in the OTDR results if you do not use a launch cord. The launch event shows on the EventMap and in the event table at 0 m and has 0 dB loss. The OTDR trace shows the launch event marker (an orange, dotted line) at the location shown on the EventMap and event table. If the tester cannot find the launch and tail event when you set up the launch compensation function, enter the lengths of the cords manually. How to Retract the Launch/Tail Cord When you do not use the launch/tail cord, retract the cord and use the strap to hold the connectors against the case. See Figure 47. 234 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module About Launch and Tail Cords Caution Do not make tight bends in the fibers. GPU44.EPS Figure 47. How to Retract the Launch/Tail Cord 235 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook OTDR Port Connection Quality When you do an OTDR test, the test shows the quality of the OTDR port connection (Figure 48). If a test takes more than approximately 3 seconds, the PROGRESS screen also shows a preview of the OTDR trace. The trace is black for one wavelength and blue for the other wavelength. If the gauge is not in the Good range Clean the OTDR port and the fiber connector. Use a video probe to inspect the endfaces in the port and fiber connector for scratches and other damage. If an endface on the tester shows damage, contact Fluke Networks for service information. If the gauge stays outside the Good range, remove the adapter from the module and inspect the adapter for damage. Make sure that the white plastic ring inside the center tube shows no damage. A poor OTDR connection increases the dead zone at the connector. The dead zone can hide faults that are near the OTDR connector. A poor connection also decreases the strength of the signal from the OTDR. The weaker signal causes more noise on the trace, which can cause the OTDR to miss events. It also decreases the dynamic range. When the test is completed, the quality gauge shows in the details for the OTDR Port event on the EventMap screens. The tester includes the gauge with the test results you save. 236 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Port Connection Quality GPU17.EPS Figure 48. The OTDR Port Connection Quality Gauge and Progress Screen 237 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Do an OTDR Test Figure 49 shows the equipment for OTDR tests. To do an OTDR test 1 Make sure that the home screen shows the correct settings for the job. If it is not necessary to use specific settings, set the test type to Auto OTDR to make sure the results show all of the events on the fiber. 2 Clean and inspect the connectors on the launch and tail cords and the fiber to be tested. 3 Connect the tester to the link as shown in Figure 50, 51, or 52. 4 Tap TEST or press . Note The tester shows a warning if there is an optical signal on the fiber. C A E B D GPU31.EPS Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module installed Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) Launch and tail cords (match the Fiber cleaning supplies fiber to be tested) AC adapter with line cord (optional) Figure 49. Equipment for OTDR Tests 238 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module How to Do an OTDR Test Fiber link Launch cord Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU03.EPS Figure 50. OTDR Connected with a Launch Cord 239 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Tail cord Fiber link Launch cord Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU04.EPS Figure 51. OTDR Connected with Launch and Tail Cords 240 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module How to Do an OTDR Test Spool of fiber Mechanical splice Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module GPU05.EPS Figure 52. OTDR Connected to a Spool of Fiber 241 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook OTDR Results Notes The tester shows measurements with “>” or “<“ when the actual value is possibly more or less than the value shown. For example, this can occur for hidden events or for measurements that are out of the range of the tester. When a test is completed, the type of screen the tester shows first (EventMap, TABLE, or TRACE) is the type you looked at last. EventMap Notes The EventMap combines the results for all wavelengths used for the test. If an event on the EventMap does not show on the event table or OTDR trace, change the wavelength on those screens. The EventMap does not show ghosts. Refer to Figure 53: The ID for the results. If Auto Save is off, Result not saved shows. The end of the fiber. The length of the fiber segment between two events. A reflective event: : A reflective event, which is usually a connector. Measurements for the event are all within the test limits. : One or more measurements for the event exceeds the limit. 242 : Launch and tail cords and their connectors show in gray. The map shows these if Launch Compensation is on and the cords are connected. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results A K B C J I H D G E F GPU11EPS Figure 53. EventMap Example 1 : The arrow icon shows when there are more events that do not show on the screen. To see the events, tap the icon or scroll the map. When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. The fiber type and test limit the tester used for the test, and the ID the tester will use for the next results that you save. When a test is completed, the window shows information for the event that has the worst measurement. The information windows show the worst results of the wavelengths used for the test. 243 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook If the window border is green, the measurements for the event do not exceed the limits. If the window border is red, a measurement exceeds the limits. If the window border is blue, the tester does not give a pass or fail result to the event because it cannot do a full analysis of the event. This occurs for OTDR Port, Hidden, and End events. This occurs for all events if you use the Document Only test limit because Document Only does not have values for limits. When you use a test limit that has a reflectance limit, Hidden events show a fail status if their reflectance exceeds the limit. : The measurement exceeds the limit. : The measurement is within the limit. To see details for the event, tap the window. See Figure 57 on page 257. To see information for another event, tap another icon on the map. Note Events before the launch cord connector and after the tail cord connector do not have a pass or fail status. Overall Loss: The loss of the cabling. This does not include the OTDR connection and the loss of the last event. If Launch Compensation is on, the overall loss includes the launch and tail connectors, but not the launch and tail fibers. If you did the test at two wavelengths, the tester shows the highest loss of the two wavelengths. N/A shows for the Overall Loss if the tester cannot measure the loss. This can occur when events are too close together or when there is a large reflective event near the end of the fiber. 244 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results Fiber Length: The length of the fiber. The units show in meters (m) or feet (ft). If Launch Compensation is on, the length does not include the length of the launch and tail cords. PASS/FAIL: The overall result for the fiber. PASS: All measurements are within the test limits. FAIL: One or more measurements exceed the limit. 245 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B C D A E GPU22.EPS Figure 54. EventMap Example 2 Length of the tail cord (top) and launch cord (bottom). A loss event, such as a splice or bend: : Measurements for the event are all within the test limits. If the event has negative loss, it is a Gainer. See page 253. : One or more measurements for the event exceeds the limit. : The event is hidden by a previous event. The map shows a dotted line around hidden events and the event that causes them to be hidden. The tester combines the loss of all the events that are in the dotted line. To see the combined loss, tap the event that causes the hidden event (). 246 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results The tester does not show loss measurements for hidden events. See HIDDEN on page 251. : The event is hidden by a previous event. The reflectance of the event exceeds the limit. This icon shows only when the test limit has a limit for reflectance. The cause of the hidden event. In this example, the cause is a connector on a short patch cord. The loss of the second connector is hidden in the attenuation dead zone of the first connector. Tap to see information about the selected event. 247 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Event Table The event table shows a list of the events on the fiber. To see the event table, tap TABLE on the OTDR results screen. Figure 55 shows an example of an event table. Table 11 gives descriptions of the event types. F A E B D C GPU12.EPS Figure 55. Event Table To see details for an event, tap the event in the table. Scroll the table if necessary to see all the events. 248 (ft) or (m): The distance to the event LOSS: The loss of the event. REFLECT: The reflectance of the event. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results TYPE: The event type. See Table 11. Notes The OTDR Port and End events always show N/A for loss because backscatter measurements are not available on both sides of those events. If an event shows “---” in the LOSS and REFLECT columns, the tester did not find the event at the selected wavelength. Tap an arrow button () to see the measurements for the other wavelength. Tap to see help for this screen. OVERALL: Tap this button to see overall measurements of length, loss, and optical return loss for the fiber. When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. If the tester made measurements at two wavelengths, tap the arrow buttons to see results for the other wavelength. Possibly, some events show only at one wavelength. : The measurement is within the limit. : The measurement exceeds the limit. : The tester does not give a pass or fail result to the event. This occurs for OTDR Port, Hidden, and End events. This occurs for all events if you use the Document Only test limit because Document Only does not have values for limits. When you use a test limit that has a reflectance limit, Hidden events show a fail status if their reflectance exceeds the limit. To see details for an event, such as limits for measurements and the SEGMENT ATTENUATION coefficient, tap the event in the table. 249 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 11. Event Types Event Reflection A pulse of light reflected back to the OTDR. Description Reflections are caused by a connector, a tight bend, a mechanical splice, or a crack in the fiber. Reflective events can possibly be ghost events. These are frequently smaller than reflective events that are connectors. If the reflection is not caused by a connector, inspect the cable for tight bends or damage. Use a visual fault locator to verify the fault. OTDR Port The connector on the OTDR. This event is the OTDR port on the tester. The OTDR Port event always shows N/A for loss because backscatter measurements are not available on both sides of the event. The tester does not give a PASS/FAIL status to this event. Launch The end of the launch cord. Tail The start of the tail cord. Loss An event where the level of reflected light suddenly decreases, and the reflection from the event is too small to measure. The tester identifies these events if you connected launch and tail cords and turned on LAUNCH COMPENSATION on the TEST SETUP screen. See “About Launch and Tail Cords” on page 226. Caused by a splice, bend, or a low-reflectance connection, such as an angled physical contact (APC) connection. If the loss event is not caused by a splice or APC connection, inspect the cable for tight bends, especially if the loss is more at a higher wavelength. When the tester uses a narrower pulse width, some loss events can show as reflective events. 250 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results Table 11. Event Types (continued) End The end of the fiber The End event always shows N/A for loss because backscatter measurements are not available on both sides of the event. The tester does not give a PASS/FAIL status to this event, unless you use a custom test limit that includes a limit for segment attenuation, and the segment before the End event fails. Hidden End The end of the fiber is in the attenuation dead zone of the previous event. Hidden The event is in the attenuation dead zone of the previous event. The tester cannot give an accurate distance to the end of the fiber because the end is hidden. The tester does not give a PASS/FAIL status to this event. The tester detected the event, but does not have enough information to measure its loss separately from the previous event. Thus, the tester includes the loss of the hidden event with the loss of the previous event. The loss of the hidden event shows as N/A. A hidden event is often the end of a patch cord that is hidden in the dead zone made by the first connector on the cord. To get a better view of hidden events, do a Manual OTDR test with the Averaging Time set to Best Resolution. Narrow pulse widths can also help you see hidden events. If the event is not a connection, inspect the fiber near the location of the event. Use a visual fault locator to see faults such as cracks or breaks in the fiber. The tester does not give a PASS/FAIL status to this event, unless the test limit has a limit for reflectance and the hidden event exceeds the limit. (continued) 251 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 11. Event Types (continued) Ghost (Also known as an “echo”.) The event is a copy of another reflection. It is caused by light bouncing back and forth between connectors. Page 298 shows OTDR traces with gainers. Caused by a dirty or unseated connector, highlyreflective connector, a connector with an incorrect polish, a sharp bend, or a crack in a fiber. To see where to look for the fault, find the Ghost Source in the event table. The ghost source is always before the ghost. The event table does not show ghosts that occur after the end event. If the ghost source is a hidden event, the tester possibly will not identify a ghost event as a ghost. The tester does not give a PASS/FAIL status to this event. Ghost Source A reflective event that causes an ghost. Caused by a dirty or unseated connector, highlyreflective connector, a connector with the wrong polish, a sharp bend, or a crack in a fiber. On traces with multiple ghosts, the event table possibly shows only the strongest ghost source. You can usually see that other reflections are ghosts because they occur at multiples of distances to connectors and they show almost no loss. Verify that the connector is seated properly. Inspect connectors that cause ghosts. If a connector is apparently not the ghost source, use a visual fault locator to look for bends or cracks in the fiber near the ghost source. 252 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results Table 11. Event Types (continued) Gainer An apparent gain in the strength of the returned signal. A gainer shows as a negative value of loss. Page 297 shows OTDR traces gainers. Caused by a splice or connection between two fibers that have different backscatter coefficients, numerical apertures, core diameters, or mode field diameters. The tester compares the loss of non-reflective gainers to the limits for splice loss to give the event a PASS/FAIL status. If a gainer occurs at a connection, the gainer shows as a Reflection event with negative loss. The tester compares reflective gainers to the limits for reflective events to give the event a PASS/FAIL status. Strong reflections at or before an event can cause tailing after the event, which can cause a measurement of negative loss. To find the cause of a gainer, see if the fiber type is different before and after the splice or connection. Replace fiber if necessary. Fibers that are the same can possibly have different tolerances, which can cause gainers at a splice. When this occurs, the splice is usually good and does not require rework. If you do the OTDR test from the other end, the gainer event will show a loss. If you add this loss to the gain from the other direction, you get the true loss of the event. If you upload the results to LinkWare software, you can use the bidirectional averaging utility in LinkWare to calculate the true loss of gainers. Gainers at launch events can occur when the launch cord does not have the same properties as the fiber under test. In this situation, you can get more reliable results if you do a bi-directional test and calculate the true loss as described above. Use a tail cord that has the same properties as the launch cord and use Launch + Tail compensation. (continued) 253 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 11. Event Types (continued) No Fiber No fiber is connected to the OTDR port, or the fiber is too short. Connect a fiber to the port or to the launch cord. If a fiber is connected: Make sure the connection is tight and there are no breaks or cracks in the fiber near the port. Clean and inspect the port connector. Do a Manual OTDR test with a narrow pulse width. Out of Range The tester did not find an end event. This can occur for Manual OTDR tests when the range you selected is too short. Select a higher range on the TEST SETUP screen. For Auto OTDR tests, Out of Range can occur when the cabling is much longer than the range of the module. Rarely, very bad connections along the cabling can cause the OTDR to select a range that is too short. Compare the expected cabling length to the maximum range of the module. If the length is within range, try the Manual OTDR test with the maximum range setting. For DataCenter OTDR tests, Out of Range can occur if the link is longer than the range of the test. Weak Signal The signal is attenuated below the background noise level before the tester found the end of the fiber. No Signal The tester did not receive any reflected light from the fiber or from the OTDR port connector. 254 No fiber is connected to the OTDR port, the fiber is too short, there is a bad connector in the link, the fiber is broken or bent, or the fiber is very long. Weak Signal can also occur if the fiber has very high loss or you did a Manual OTDR and the pulse width was too narrow. There is a problem with the module. If this event continues to occur, contact Fluke Networks for assistance. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results OVERALL FIBER RESULTS Screens The OVERALL FIBER RESULT screen shows more information about the link. To see this screen, tap OVERALL on the TABLE screen. A B C D E J I F GH GPU19.EPS Figure 56. OVERALL FIBER RESULT Screen Fiber Length: The length of the fiber. Overall Loss: The loss of the connectors and the fiber in the link. Test Limit: The test limit the OTDR used for the test. The wavelengths the tester used for the test. Measurements of overall loss for each wavelength the tester used. The measurement is red if it exceeds the limit. 255 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook LIMIT: The maximum loss allowed by the selected test limit for each wavelength the tester used. MARGIN: The difference between the limit and the measured loss for each wavelength the tester used. Margin is negative if the loss exceeds the limit. Tap to see help for this screen. If the results include warnings, tap to see the warnings. If a warning caused the test to fail, tap to see the warning. Some conditions make the OTDR test fail even when all measurements are within the limits. OPTICAL RETURN LOSS: This tab shows the ORL for the link. Optical return loss is the total light reflected for all fiber and components in the link. This includes the launch/tail cord events, fiber segments, connectors, splices, and faults. If launch compensation is on, this includes only the fiber between the launch and tail connections, including the launch and tail events. If not, it includes the fiber from the OTDR port connection, including the OTDR port connection, to the end of the fiber. The last connector is not included, unless it has a reflectance that is below the reflectance of the fiber, as can occur with APC connectors. ORL is the ratio of the light from the source to the light that the link reflects back to the source. ORL values are in units of positive decibels. A larger ORL value shows that less light is reflected back to the source. For example, a link with an ORL of 45 dB reflects less light back to the source than a link with an ORL of 30 dB. LENGTH: This tab shows the length of the fiber and the maximum length allowed by the test limit. If the distance to the end of the fiber does not agree at all wavelengths, this tab shows the longest length. 256 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results EVENT DETAILS Screen The EVENT DETAILS screen shows more information about events. To see this screen, tap the information window for an event in the EventMap or in the event table. A B C J I D E F G H GPU13.EPS Figure 57. EVENT DETAILS Screen The type of event (see Table 11) and the distance from the tester to the event. The wavelengths the tester used for the test. Possibly, some events show only at one wavelength. The loss of the event for the wavelength the tester used. 257 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook LIMIT: The maximum loss allowed by the selected test limit for each wavelength the tester used. N/A shows if there is no test limit for the measurement. MARGIN: The difference between the limit and the measured loss for each wavelength the tester used. Margin is negative if the loss exceeds the limit. N/A shows if there is no test limit for the measurement. Tap to see help for this screen. To see details for the event before or after this one, tap or next to Events. The Min/Max control shows if the test limit has a minimum and maximum value for the measurement. Tap the control to see the values. Most industry-standard limits do not have minimum values. REFLECTANCE: Reflectance is the return loss for one event. It is the ratio of the light reflected at one point on the fiber to the light that gets to that point from the source. Reflectance values are in units of negative decibels. A smaller (more negative) reflectance value shows that less light is reflected back to the source. For example, a reflectance of -45 dB shows for a good multimode connection. A reflectance of-20 dB shows for a bad multimode connection that reflects more light back to the OTDR. Reflectances that exceed the measurement range of the tester show a ">" (greater than) symbol. If any reflection shows ">", ORL shows "<" (less than). Reflectances from hidden events can possibly show “<" because the tester cannot measure the backscatter before the event. Note Reflectance measurements are affected by the backscatter value you enter on the TEST SETUP screen. 258 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results SEGMENT ATTENUATION: This tab shows the attenuation coefficient of the fiber segment before the event. This is the attenuation per unit of length for the segment. This value shows as N/A if the tester could not measure it accurately. This can occur for short segments or if the connector before the segment has too much tailing. About Measurements that Show “<“ and “>” In some situations, measurements show with a "<" or ">" (less than or greater than) symbol. This occurs if the fiber is too long, the signal is weak, events are very close together, or a measurement is beyond the range of the tester. 259 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook OTDR Trace To see the OTDR trace, tap TRACE on the OTDR results screen. Figure 58 shows an example of an OTDR trace. K J A B I C D H E F G GPU14.EPS Figure 58. OTDR Trace The decibel scale shows the level of backscatter. The tester sets the backscatter level at the start of the trace to approximately 0 dB. The measurement cursor. To measure loss and distance, tap the yellow circle so that MARK shows, drag the cursor to the start of the measurement, tap MARK, then drag the cursor to the end of the measurement. See “How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the OTDR Trace” on page 262. 260 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results When the cursor is on an event, this area shows the event type. See Table 11 on page 250. The text is green if the event passed, red if the event failed, or black is there is no limit for measurements. The event type does not show after you tap MARK to use the measurement cursor. Tap to see help for this screen. Tap SETTINGS to see the settings the tester used for the OTDR test. The tester saves the settings with the result. Tap or to move the cursor to another event. The wavelength the tester used for the test. If the tester used more than one wavelength, tap or to see the other wavelength. Possibly, some events show only at one wavelength. You can select wavelengths on the TEST SETUP screen. When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. The distance scale shows the distance along the fiber. Markers for the end of the launch cord and the beginning of the tail cord are orange, dashed lines. PASS: All measurements were within the limits. FAIL: One or more measurements exceeded its limit. To zoom in and out, use the pinch, reverse-pinch, and doubletap gestures on the touchscreen. You can also use the zoom controls to change the magnification on the distance and decibels scales independently. See Figure 5 on page 18. 261 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the OTDR Trace You can use the cursor on the OTDR trace to measure distance and loss along the cabling. As you move the cursor, the tester calculates averages around the mark and cursor locations. This decreases the effects of noise on measurements. To use the measurement cursor Refer to Figure 59. 1 Tap the yellow circle at the top of the cursor () so that MARK shows. 2 While MARK shows, use one of these methods to move the cursor to the point where you want to start the measurement: 3 Drag the cursor with the yellow circle (). Tap or press and hold To move the cursor to an event, tap Events (). or (). or next to Tap MARK, then while UNMARK shows, move the cursor to the point where you want to end the measurement. Note If UNMARK and the cursor controls do not show, tap the yellow circle. These indicators show on the screen: 4 262 dB = : The difference in the power levels (in decibels) between the start and end of the green measurement bar. m or ft = : The distance between the start and end of the green measurement bar. dB/km or dB/kft = : Power loss (in decibels) that would occur over 1 km (1000 m) or 1 kft (1000 ft) of fiber. The tester uses the loss between the start and end of the green measurement bar to calulate this value. To make a new measurement, tap the yellow circle, tap UNMARK (), then do steps 1, 2, and 3 again. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results I A B C C D J E K FG H GPU18.EPS Figure 59. How to Use the Measurement Cursor on the ODTR Trace To specify the start of a measurement, tap the yellow circle (), then tap MARK. To see the MARK and UNMARK buttons, tap the yellow circle. To move the cursor in small increments, tap or press and hold or . If these buttons do not show, tap the yellow circle on the cursor. The measurement in the square is the distance from the start of the fiber to the yellow cursor. When the cursor is on an event before you set the mark, this area shows the event type. See Table 11 on page 250. The text is green if the event passed, red if the event failed, or black is there is no limit for measurements. After you set the mark, the event type does not show. Tap SETTINGS to see the settings that the OTDR used for the test. 263 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To move the cursor to an event, tap If the tester used two wavelengths, tap or . or to see the other wavelength. To start another measurement, tap UNMARK. If UNMARK does not show, tap the yellow circle (). The green measurement bar goes from the start point to the end point of your measurement. dB: The difference in the power levels (in decibels) between the start and end of the green bar. m or ft: The distance between the start and end of the green bar. dB/km or dB/kft: The power loss (in decibels) that would occur over 1 km (1000 m) or 1 kft (1000 ft) of fiber based on the loss between the start and end of the green bar. Bi-Directional OTDR Tests OTDR tests from both ends of a link can give different results because the properties of each fiber segment in a link are not always the same. The differences can cause differences in the loss measurements in each direction. For example, if a segment after a connector or splice has a higher backscatter value than the segment before, the tester shows different values of loss for the connector or splice from the two directions. The loss of an event is the difference between the backscatter levels before and after the event. From one direction, the tester first sees the lower backscatter value, then the event, then the higher backscatter value. The higher backscatter after the event makes the loss of the connector apparently lower than the loss from the other direction. 264 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results Do an OTDR test from the other direction if you get these results: The OTDR event table shows a gainer (see Table 11). The OTDR event table shows a hidden event (see Table 11). The loss of a connector or splice is unusually low. The loss of a connector or splice is unusually high, and you are sure that the connector or splice is good. There is a splice on the fiber, but it does not show in the OTDR test results. Note On multimode fibers, the loss of a splice can be different for the two directions. This difference is caused by differences in the modal distribution of light in the launch cords and differences in how multimode light propagates down the fiber in each direction. Bi-directional tests are frequently included in the requirements for jobs. How To Do a Bi-directional Test 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 On the CHANGE ID screen, turn off the Auto Save function and set the End 1/End 2 control to End 1. 3 Enter names for the ends of the fiber (optional): a. On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the panel that shows End 1:. b. On the EDIT END NAME screen, tap the End 1 and End 2 panels to use the keyboard to enter names for each end. Tap DONE to save the names. 4 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap DONE. 5 Clean and inspect all connectors, then connect the tester to End 1 of the link. 265 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 6 Tap TEST or press , then save the result. 7 Clean and inspect the connector for End 2 of the link, then connect the tester to End 2. 8 Press , then tap the Next ID panel. 9 Tap the End 1/End 2 control at the top of the screen to make it show End 2, then tap DONE. 10 Tap TEST or press . 11 Save the result with the same ID you used for End 1. How To Do Bi-directional Tests for All IDs in a Set In this procedure, you test all the links from End 1, then test them all again from End 2. 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 If necessary, tap CHANGE CABLE IDs to select or make an ID set. 3 On the CHANGE ID screen, turn on the Auto Save function and set the End 1/End 2 control to End 1. 4 Enter names for the ends of the fiber (optional): a. On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the panel that shows End 1:. b. On the EDIT END NAME screen, tap the End 1 and End 2 panels to use the keyboard to enter names for each end. Tap DONE to save the names. 266 5 Tap DONE on the CHANGE ID screen. 6 Clean and inspect the connector for End 1 of the link that has the first ID in the set. 7 Connect the tester to End 1 of the link, then tap TEST or press . 8 Clean and inspect the connector for End 1 of the link that has the next ID in the set. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module OTDR Results 9 Connect the tester to End 1 of the next link, then tap TEST or press . 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for all IDs in the set. 11 Press , then tap the Next ID panel. 12 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End 1/End 2 control at the top of the screen to make it show End 2. In the list under IDs Untested, the tester highlights the first ID that does not include results for End 2. This should be the first ID in the set. 13 Tap DONE on the CHANGE ID screen. 14 Clean and inspect the connector for End 2 of the link that has the first ID in the set. 15 Connect the tester to End 2 of the link, then tap TEST or press . 16 Clean and inspect the connector for End 2 of the link that has the next ID in the set. 17 Connect the tester to End 2 of the next link, then tap TEST or press . 18 Repeat steps 16 and 17 for all IDs in the set. How to Do Bi-Directional Averaging You can use bi-directional results to get higher accuracy for loss measurements you make with an OTDR. If you upload bidirectional results to LinkWare software, you can use the bidirectional averaging utility in LinkWare to calculate an average loss for both directions. The average value is usually more accurate than a measurement in one direction. 267 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Real Time Trace The real time trace lets you see changes in the OTDR trace as they occur. In this mode, the tester updates the OTDR trace several times each second. This mode helps you do tasks such as these: Find intermittent problems, such as those that occur only when you bend a fiber or apply force to a connector. Quickly see differences in segment lengths and the locations of connections in different links. Use the real time trace to look at one link, then connect to another link to quickly see a trace and compare it to the previous trace. Align fibers when you make a splice. Caution Before you use the OTDR to help you make a splice, read the instructions for the splice machine. The light pulses from the OTDR can cause problems for some splice machines. Note The real time trace uses a lot of battery power. Use the ac adapter when you use this test for an extended period of time. The real time trace test has two modes: auto length and fixed length. 268 AUTO LENGTH: The tester makes necessary adjustments in its range and pulse width periodically or whenever the trace changes. These adjustments make the trace fill the screen for the best overall view of the fiber. The locations shown for connections and other features change if the range changes. The real time trace starts in auto length mode. FIXED LENGTH: The tester does not change any parameters for measurements, even if the trace changes. (The tester possibly adjusts the resolution and range at the beginning of the test for a faster test.) This mode helps you stay zoomed-in on an event when the fiber changes. Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Real Time Trace If a large change in the fiber length occurs, change to AUTO LENGTH mode, then change to FIXED LENGTH mode again. To use the real time trace 1 Clean and inspect the connectors on the launch and tail cords and the fiber to be tested. 2 Connect the tester to the link as shown in Figure 50, 51, or 52. 3 On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon then tap Real Time Trace. 4 In the SELECT A WAVELENGTH popup, select a wavelength for the test. If you select Auto, the tester selects the wavelength that gives the best dynamic range and the smallest dead zones for the link. If the necessary wavelengths do not show, press , tap the test setup panel, then on the CHANGE TEST screen, select a test that has the necessary wavelengths. 5 On the Real Time Trace screen: To use the fixed-length mode, tap FIXED LENGTH. To zoom in and out on the trace, use the pinch, reversepinch, and double-tap gestures on the touchscreen. See Figure 5 on page 18. To stop and start the test, tap STOP and RESUME. To exit the test, tap STOP then tap EXIT. To save the current results, tap STOP then tap SAVE. Notes The results for the real time trace show only the OTDR trace at one wavelength. The real time trace result does not include a PASS/ FAIL status. The real time trace does not show the markers for the launch and tail cords. 269 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Manual OTDR Mode Manual OTDR mode lets you select settings that give you the best view of specific events on the OTDR trace. To use manual OTDR mode 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, select an OTDR test to set up as a manual test, then tap EDIT. Or to set up a new OTDR test, tap NEW TEST then tap Auto OTDR or Manual OTDR. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Test Type, then tap Manual OTDR. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Manual OTDR Settings, then select settings for the test. See Table 12. 5 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. 6 Clean and inspect the connectors on the launch and tail cords and the fiber to be tested. 7 Connect the tester to the link as shown in Figure 50, 51, or 52. 8 Tap TEST or press . When a trace shows on the PROGRESS screen, you can press the STOP button to stop the OTDR test at the first wavelength and start the test at the next wavelength (if you selected two wavelengths). This lets you control the time the tester takes to give OTDR results. You can stop the test to get results more quickly, but the results are possibly less accurate. 270 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Manual OTDR Mode Table 12. Manual OTDR Settings Range The Range is the maximum distance shown on the trace. Select the range that is nearest to, but not less than, the distance to the event you want to examine. If the tester does not correctly identify the end event, select the next higher range, then do the OTDR test again. Auto: The tester selects a range that gives the best possible view of the events on the fiber. The range is not limited to the fixed ranges provided. Pulse Width Adjust the pulse width to a wider setting to see farther down the fiber or to a narrower setting for better resolution. Narrower pulses let you see more detail in and around reflective events and help you see events that are close together (hidden events). But narrower pulses reduce the range of the OTDR and make traces that have more background noise between events. When you use narrower pulses, small loss events can possibly be hidden in the noise on the trace. Wider pulses increase the backscatter level, which gives a better signal-to-noise ratio around non-reflective events. This helps you see smaller loss events and measure their loss more accurately, but increases the dead zones of events. Wider pulses can also hide small reflections. Auto: The tester selects the narrowest pulse that still lets you see loss events. (continued) 271 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 12. Manual OTDR Settings (continued) Averaging Time The averaging time is the time the tester uses to make measurements and calculate averages of the measurements. Auto: The tester adjusts the test settings to give a good view of events on the trace while it keeps the test time to a minimum. Quick Test: The tester adjusts the test settings to keep the test time to a minimum. This setting decreases accuracy, increases dead zones, and can give a trace that shows fewer details. Use this setting to do a test quickly when it is not necessary to see small details on the trace. A Quick Test can possibly take up to 3 minutes if the fiber length is near the maximum range for the tester for the selected pulse width. Best Resolution: The tester adjusts the test settings to keep dead zones to a minimum. This setting lets you see more events in and around reflective events. The test usually takes longer than a test with Auto or Quick Test selected. Tests with Auto or Best Resolution selected can take up to 3 minutes per wavelength for some fibers. 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 90, 120, and 180 seconds per wavelength: Longer times give these results: The trace has less noise, which increases the dynamic range and increases the accuracy of measurements. You can see small events, such as splices, more clearly on the trace. The tester makes more measurements, so the test takes more time. Shorter times give these results: The trace has more noise, which decreases the dynamic range. The increased noise hides small events on the trace. The tester makes fewer measurements, so the test takes less time. 272 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Manual OTDR Mode Table 12. Manual OTDR Settings (continued) End Threshold Lets you set the threshold (in decibels) for detection of the end of the fiber. An event that is above the threshold is shown as the end of the fiber. The range for this setting is 1 dB to 25 dB inclusive. To set the threshold to Auto, tap Auto on the END THRESHOLD screen. Loss Threshold Lets you set the threshold (in decibels) for loss (nonreflective) events. Events at or above the threshold are included in the event table. The range for this setting is 0.01 dB to 1.50 dB inclusive. When you select smaller threshold values (0.01 dB to 0.3 dB), the tester makes a trace with less noise. To do this, the tester makes more measurements to be averaged or uses wider pulse widths. Thus, smaller values can possibly increase test times or dead zones. Auto sets the threshold to a value based on the selected test limit, usually 0.10 dB. To set the threshold to Auto, tap Auto on the LOSS THRESHOLD screen. Notes When you set a loss threshold, you cannot be sure that the tester will find all events that are at or above the threshold. The characteristics of the fiber and the use of a manual Averaging Time or Pulse Width can possibly reduce the number of events the tester finds. If you set the loss threshold to less than 0.1 dB, the tester can possibly find many false events caused by imperfections in the fiber. 273 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook The FaultMap Test The FaultMap test helps you record the connections in a fiber link and identify bad connections. It can show short patch cords and find connections that have high reflectance. The FaultMap test gives you these results: Shows a map of the connectors in the link that possibly do not show on the OTDR EventMap. The map includes connectors that are hidden in the dead zones made by previous events. The FaultMap test shows patch cords as short as 0.5 m for lengths < 2 km. Shows connections that are poor because they have high reflectance (> -35 dB). Reflective events that are apparently not connectors do not show on the FaultMap diagram. Loss events are also not shown. The FaultMap test finds events that have a reflectance larger than approximately -50 dB on multimode fiber and -60 dB on singlemode fiber. (More negative values mean less reflectance and a better connection. For example, a connector with a reflectance of -40 dB is better than one with -35 dB.) Notes Since the FaultMap test finds only reflections, do not use it to look for fusion splices or angled physical contact (APC) connectors. FaultMap results do not include a PASS/FAIL status. The results are only for your documentation of the link. FaultMap tests on singlemode fiber usually take more time than OTDR tests. The test uses very narrow pulses on singlemode fiber to make the smallest event dead zones possible, and does more analysis on the reflections in the link. 274 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module The FaultMap Test How to Do the FaultMap Test Notes The FaultMap test does not use the launch compensation settings. The FaultMap test uses the wavelength that gives the best results. Figure 60 shows the equipment for the FaultMap test. 1 Clean and inspect the connectors on the launch and tail cords or patch cords and the link to be tested. 2 Connect the launch cord to the OTDR port and the link to be tested, as shown in Figure 61. Connect a tail cord to the far end of the link if necessary. Or, you can use a patch cord that is 1 m long at minimum to connect the tester to the link. To see results for the far-end connector, connect a tail cord or patch cord (>1 m) to the far end of the link. 3 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 4 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the FaultMap test, then tap USE SELECTED. If a FaultMap test is not available, tap NEW TEST to add one to the project. Tap TEST or press . 275 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook C B E A D GPU39.EPS Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module installed Launch and tail cords or patch cords (match the fiber to be tested) Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) Fiber cleaning supplies AC adapter with line cord (optional) Figure 60. Equipment for FaultMap Tests 276 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module The FaultMap Test Tail cord or patch cord (optional) Launch cord or patch cord (optional) Main Versiv unit with OptiFiber Pro module Figure 61. FaultMap Test Connections GPU41.EPS 277 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook FaultMap Screen A E B H C G D F E Figure 62. FaultMap Screen GPU15T.EPS Note The FaultMap test does not use the launch compensation settings. The results show the launch and tail cords and their connectors in the same colors as other cords and connectors. The ID for the results. If Auto Save is off, Result not saved shows. : An event that has a reflectance smaller than -35 dB. The length of the fiber segment between two events. 278 Chapter 9: How to Use the OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module The FaultMap Test : An event that has a reflectance larger than -35 dB. It is possibly a connector that is dirty, poorly polished, scratched, cracked, misaligned, unseated, worn, or the wrong type. : The arrow icon shows when there are more events that do not show on the screen. To see the events, tap the icon or scroll the screen. Names for the ends of the link. For example, the names can describe the locations of the ends: “TELECOM” for the ends in the telecommunications closet and “OFFICE” for the ends in offices. You can enter names on the CHANGE ID screen. See Figure 72 on page 321. When more than one button shows at the bottom of the screen, the tester highlights one in yellow to recommend which one to tap. See “Buttons to Do Tests and Save Results” on page 53. If the window is blue, the reflectance of the event is smaller than -35 dB. If the window is orange, the reflectance is larger than -35 dB. To see the window for another event, tap another icon on the fiber. Fiber Length: The length of the fiber. This includes the lengths of the launch and tail cords, if you used them. 279 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 280 Chapter 10: The FiberInspector Test The optional DI-1000 video probe connects to the type A USB port on the Versiv main unit to let you inspect the endfaces in fiber optic connectors. The probe lets you see dirt, scratches, and other defects that can cause unsatisfactory performance or failures in fiber optic networks. 281 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Do the FiberInspector Test Figure 63 shows the equipment for a FiberInspector test. B C D A GPU49.EPS Main Versiv unit with CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro module installed Note You can do the FiberInspector test with no module installed. Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) Fiber cleaning supplies AC adapter with line cord (optional) Figure 63. Equipment for the FiberInspector Test 282 Chapter 10: The FiberInspector Test How to Do the FiberInspector Test To do the FiberInspector test 1 Connect the probe to the type A US port on the side of the tester. 2 Make sure the correct tip is on the probe. 3 Clean the connector that you will inspect. 4 Do the FiberInspector test: To do the FiberInspector test when it is in the project a. On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. b. On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the FiberInspector test, then tap USE SELECTED. c. Tap Test or press . To do the FiberInspector test when it is not in a project On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap FiberInspector. 5 Insert the probe into the connector. 6 To adjust the focus, turn the knob on the probe clockwise or counterclockwise. Note The button on the DI-1000 probe has no function when you use the probe with the Versiv tester. 7 To save the image, tap SAVE. Enter an ID for the test, then tap SAVE. Notes The Auto Save function does not operate with the FiberInspector test. Continuous use of the video probe decreases the battery life. To increase the battery life, connect the ac adapter when you use the probe for more than a few minutes. 283 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook F A E B C D Figure 64. FiberInspector Image with Measurement Scales (fiber with 50 µm core shown) GPU25.EPS Note To see the buttons for the measurement axes and core scales and to change the magnification of the screen, you must first tap to put the screen in still mode. You can use the round, horizontal, and vertical scales to measure the size of the fiber core and cladding. You can also measure the size of particles, scratches, and other defects on the endface. 284 Chapter 10: The FiberInspector Test How to Do the FiberInspector Test To show the scales, tap SCALE ON (). Outer, blue ring: 250 µm cladding Middle, green rings: 120 µm and 130 µm Inner, yellow rings: 25 µm and 62.5 µm (to change the size, tap NEXT SCALE) To adjust the brightness or contrast of the image, tap , then move the bars on the controls. To hide the controls, tap again. To show the scales (), tap , then tap SCALE ON. To change the size of the measurement ring for the fiber core, tap NEXT SCALE. To give a PASS or FAIL grade to the image, tap GRADE. See . To put the screen in still mode and turn off the probe, tap Tap . to turn on the probe again. To give the image a grade of PASS or FAIL, tap GRADE (). If you set the grade to FAIL, then save the image, the ID for the image is in the list of tests to do again. To zoom in and out, tap to put the screen in still mode, then use the pinch, reverse-pinch, and double-tap gestures on the touchscreen. See Figure 5 on page 18. 285 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use the Core Scale The FiberInspector screen has a scale you can use to measure the size of the core and cladding on the endface image. See Figure 64. To use the core scale 1 Drag the image to the center of the screen. 2 Put the image in still mode (tap 3 Tap SCALE ON. so that shows). To see rings for different core sizes, tap NEXT SCALE. Note If the sizes of the rings do not agree with the sizes of core or cladding, use the measurement axes to measure the core or cladding. 4 286 If necessary, drag the image to align it with the rings. Chapter 11: The Visual Fault Locator Visual Fault Locator Applications The CertiFiber Pro™ OLTS modules and the OptiFiber® Pro OTDR modules include a visual fault locator that sends a red light down the fiber. The red light shows at the end of the fiber and at breaks, cracks, and sharp bends along the fiber. The VFL helps you do these tasks: Quickly verify the continuity of fibers. Identify the polarity of duplex connections. Identify connections in patch panels. See breaks and bad splices. These faults cause the fiber to emit red light. See high-loss bends. If you can see the light from the VFL at a bend in a fiber, the bend is too sharp. See connectors that have damaged fibers inside. A damaged fiber inside a connector causes a red light in the connector. Increase the quality of mechanical splices and prepolished connectors: Before you seal the splice or connector, adjust the fiber alignment for the minimum amount of light where the fibers touch. (Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer when you make splices and connectors.) 287 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Use the VFL Figure 65 shows the equipment for tests with the visual fault locator. C E B A D Main Versiv unit with CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro module installed One patch cord to connect the tester to the fiber (optional) Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) Fiber cleaning supplies AC adapter with line cord (optional) Figure 65. Equipment for Visual Fault Locator Tests 288 GPU37.EPS Chapter 11: The Visual Fault Locator How to Use the VFL To use the visual fault locator Note You can connect the visual fault locator to connectors that have 2.5 mm ferrules (SC, ST, or FC). To connect to other ferrule sizes, use a test reference cord with the correct connector at one end and a SC, ST, or FC connector at the tester end. 1 Clean and inspect the connectors on the patch cord, if used, and the fiber to be tested. 2 Connect the fiber directly to the VFL port or use the patch cord to connect to the port. 3 Use the VFL button to turn on the visual fault locator (refer to Figure 66). Or, on the home screen tap TOOLS, then tap Visual Fault Locator (VFL). You can tap the PULSE/OFF/CW (continuous wave) button on the screen to change the modes of the VFL, or use the button as shown in Figure 66. 4 Look for the red light as shown in Figure 66. 5 To see the light that comes out of a connector, hold a white paper in front of the fiber connector. Notes The fiber connector at the VFL and the fiber near the connector can emit red light when there are no faults there because the light is strong at the VFL output. The light from the VFL is possibly not visible through dark-colored fiber jackets. 289 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Verify continuity and identify fibers VFL connector VFL button Find microbends and broken fibers Find connectors that have broken fibers inside 1 Press the VFL button: VFL is on (CW, continuous wave). 2 Press again: VFL flashes (PULSE). Find splices that have broken fibers inside 3 Press again: VFL is off. Find bends that are too sharp GPU07.EPS Figure 66. How to Use the Visual Fault Locator 290 Chapter 12: How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links Common Causes of Problems in Fiber Links Most problems in fiber links are caused by dirty, scratched, or damaged connectors, as shown in Table 13. The table shows results of a survey of 89 contractors and private network owners. The results show what percentage of each group commonly found the faults listed. Table 13. Causes of Failures in Fiber Links Percentage of the Group that Commonly Finds the Fault Fault Network Owners Contractors Dirty end faces 80 % 98 % Poor polishing 72 % 88 % Broken connectors 40 % 86 % Mislabeling 8% 86 % Shattered end faces 34 % 82 % Bad splices 36 % 74 % Excessive bends 6% 66 % 291 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures Table 14. Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures Loss measurement gives a FAIL result One or more connectors is dirty, damaged, misaligned, or loose. The VFL can help you see some types of damage in connectors (Chapter 11). An OTDR, such as the Fluke Networks OptiFiber® Pro OTDR, can help you locate other types of faults (Chapter 9). There is a kink, sharp bend, or crack in a test reference cord or the fiber under test. Use the VFL to see these faults. The fiber has a bad splice. Use the VFL to see this fault. For limits that give a calculated loss value, the number of connectors or splices on the TEST SETUP screen is too low The wrong fiber type is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. The reference is incorrect. Set the reference again. For multimode test reference cords wound around mandrels, the mandrels are the wrong size. For multimode test reference cords wound around mandrels, the cords are made from bend-insensitive fiber. A test reference cord or fiber segment has the wrong core size. An OTDR can show you where the core size is wrong. The test reference cords have PC or UPC connectors, but the fiber under test has APC connectors. Loss is negative The fiber ends were dirty when you set the reference. You disconnected the test reference cord from a tester’s OUTPUT port after you set the reference. There was a kink in a test reference cord when you set the reference. The connectors were loose when you set the reference. The testers were much colder when you set the reference than during testing. Some other problem caused a bad reference value. 292 If loss is negative, set the reference again and do the test again. Chapter 12: How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures Table 14. Causes of Loss/Length Test Failures (continued) A known length of cable measures too long or too short The wrong fiber type is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. The wrong test limit is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. The index of refraction needs adjustment. To change the IR setting, tap Fiber Type Settings on the TEST SETUP screen. Power meter measurement is too low One or more connectors is dirty, damaged, misaligned, or loose. The VFL can help you see some types of damage in connectors (Chapter 11). An OTDR, such as the Fluke Networks OptiFiber® Pro OTDR, can help you locate other types of faults (Chapter 9). There is a kink, sharp bend, or crack in a test reference cord or the fiber under test. Use the VFL to see these faults. The source’s output is modulated. The test reference cord is the wrong type (SM or MM) or has the wrong core size. Power meter measurement is too high The tester is connected to an active CATV fiber. No connection in Smart Remote or Loopback mode when the fiber paths are complete. The remote is in Auto CertiFiber Pro mode, as shown by a flashing red and green LED below an OUTPUT port. To exit this mode, press the button on the module to make the LED flash green. 293 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Causes of OTDR Test Failures Table 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures A reflective event fails The event is a dirty or damaged connector. Clean and inspect the endfaces, then do the test again. The event is a connection with a dirty or damaged adapter. Clean the adapter and the endfaces or replace the adapter. The event is a poorly-seated connector. Make sure all connections are tight. A patch cord, launch/tail cord, or fiber segment has the wrong core size, backscatter coefficient, or mode field diameter. If the patch cords and launch/tail cords are the correct type, examine the OTDR trace for mismatched cable in the link. The event is a bad fusion or mechanical splice or a sharp bend. Use the OTDR trace or event table to locate these faults. The launch cord has PC or UPC connectors, but the link has APC connectors. Overall loss is too high There is one or more dirty or damaged connections in the link. Check the OTDR trace or event table for high-loss reflective events. The wrong fiber type is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. A patch cord, launch cord, or fiber segment has the wrong core size, backscatter coefficient, or mode field diameter. If the patch cords and launch cord are the correct type, do a bi-directional OTDR test and look for a gainer on the link. The link has a bad fusion or mechanical splice or a sharp bend. Use the OTDR trace or event table to find these faults. The launch cord has PC or UPC connectors, but the link under test has APC connectors. 294 Chapter 12: How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links Causes of OTDR Test Failures Table 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures (continued) Fiber length fails or the length is incorrect The fiber is broken or there is an open connection where the trace shows the fiber end. The wrong fiber type is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. The index of refraction needs adjustment. To change the IOR setting, tap Fiber Type Settings on the TEST SETUP screen. The wrong test limit is selected on the TEST SETUP screen. The overall result is FAIL, but no event shows FAIL, or an event shows FAIL, but does not exceed any limit Some conditions make the OTDR test fail even when all measurements are within the limits. For example, the test fails if Launch + Tail compensation was enabled, but you did not connect a tail cord. These conditions show as warnings when the test is completed. To see warnings caused a FAIL result, tap on the OVERALL FIBER RESULT screen (see Figure 56 on page 255). The test limit includes a limit for the attenuation coefficient, and the attenuation coefficient of the fiber segment before an event is too high. To see the attenuation coefficient for the segment before an event, tap the event on the EventMap screen, tap the information window for the event, then tap the SEGMENT ATTENUATION tab on the EVENT DETAILS screen. (continued) 295 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures (continued) The trace shows a large reflective event with high loss (top) or excessive tailing (bottom). The tester can possibly show it as the End event, though it occurs before the end of the link. GPU33.EPS The event is a dirty, scratched, cracked, misaligned, or unseated connector. Misaligned or unseated connectors can also cause large reflections that produce ghosts. Clean and inspect the connection, then do the test again. A good connector has a sharp bend or crack within its dead zone. The tester can possibly show a sharp bend as a break, especially at longer wavelengths or in Manual OTDR mode with smaller resolution settings. The event is a crack in the fiber. Use a visual fault locator to find the fault. The event is a bad fusion or mechanical splice or a sharp bend. The event is a connection between mismatched fibers (different backscatter coefficients, core sizes, numerical apertures, or other parameters). The top example could be caused by a larger core (on the left) connected to a smaller core. Do an OTDR test from the other direction and look for a reflective event that has a gain. The launch cord has PC or UPC connectors, but the link has APC connectors. 296 Chapter 12: How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links Causes of OTDR Test Failures Table 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures (continued) The trace shows a small reflective event with high loss. Can possibly show as an end event though it occurs before the end of the link. Can be caused by very sharp bend, a crack, or a mechanical splice with high loss. If the event is a bend, it usually has higher loss at a longer wavelength. Use a visual fault locator to verify the problem. This example shows a sharp bend that occurs before a connector. GPU32.EPS The trace shows an apparent increase in optical power (a “gainer”). A gainer does not cause a test failure unless it exceeds a limit, but it can indicate a problem such as a connection or splice between mismatched fibers (different backscatter coefficients, core sizes, numerical apertures, or other parameters). The top example shows a smaller core size connected to a larger core size. If you do a test from the other end, you would see a large reflective event with more loss than a connector should have. The bottom example shows a splice between smaller and larger core sizes. GPU50.EPS (continued) 297 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 15. Causes of OTDR Test Failures (continued) Top figure: Ghost after the end of the link These are not listed in the event table and usually do not indicate a fault in the link. Bottom figure: Ghost in the middle of the link Ghosts that occur in the middle of the link are listed in the event table, along with the source of the ghost. These can be caused by the following: GPU51.EPS A dirty connector A highly-reflective connector A UP or UPC connector mated to an APC connector A connector that is not seated properly. A connector that is wet with cleaning solvent. A poorly-seated connector usually shows a large loss, as shown in the example. A connector with the wrong type of polish can also cause large reflections that cause ghosts. Ghosts caused by hidden events may not show as ghosts in the event table. On traces with multiple ghosts, possibly only the strongest ghost source shows in the event table. You can usually determine that other reflections are ghosts because they occur at multiples of distances to connectors and they show almost no loss. Multiple ghosts from the same source are spaced equally apart. 298 Chapter 13: Test Results View Saved Results You can view the results in a project, or see a summary of the results in all projects. On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. The RESULTS screen shows the results in the active project. See Figure 67. To organize results and make reports you can give to customers, use LinkWare software. 299 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A K B C J I D E F G Figure 67. RESULTS Screen H GPU149.EPS The name of the active project. : The number of results that passed. This includes individual results for each ID and tests that have an result. : The number of results that failed. This includes individual results for each ID. : The number of results from tests on twisted pair cable that have measurements within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. 300 Chapter 13: Test Results View Saved Results Note These numbers show the total number of results that passed and failed in the IDs saved. So, the numbers can be more than the number of IDs saved. The cable IDs that have FAIL results and must be tested again. Because some IDs can have one or more tests that failed, the number at the top of this screen () can be more than the number of retests needed. The copper cable IDs that have measurements within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. The cable IDs that have an overall PASS or result. Because some IDs can have one or more tests that passed or have an status, the number at the top of this screen () can be more than the number of passes. Tap VIEW ALL to see a summary of the results in all the projects in the tester. TRANSFER lets you export or import results to or from a flash drive, and delete results on the flash drive. Tap MANAGE to delete or rename results that are in the tester. The scroll bar shows when the list of results is long. To use the scroll bar, tap on the bar or slide your fingertip on the bar. For example, to see the 12th result in the list, tap on “12” in the scroll bar. When you slide your fingertip on the bar, the number of the result you can see is next to your fingertip. The icons show the types of fiber test results that the result contains: OptiFiber Pro OTDR results from End 2 and End 1. The OTDR result can be from an Auto, Manual, or DataCenter OTDR test. FiberInspector results from End 2 and End 1. 301 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook FaultMap results from an OptiFiber Pro OTDR module. Real Time Trace results from End 2 and End 1 from an OptiFiber Pro OTDR module. Loss/length results from a CertiFiber Pro OLTS module. Power meter results from a CertiFiber Pro OLTS module. Tap the ID/Date control to sort the results by cable ID or by date. When you sort by ID, the results show in ascending order. When you sort by date, the latest result is at the top of the list. How to Add a Result to a Saved Fiber Results You can save the results from different fiber tests in one cable ID. For example, you can save the bi-directional OTDR results and FiberInspector results together in one ID. When you add results, these settings used to get the results must agree with the settings in the saved result: Test limit Fiber categories (singlemode/multimode, core size, category) Index of refraction (makes a warning you can override) If the settings do not agree, the tester shows a warning. To add results, select an End setting and a test as necessary, make sure the Next ID is correct, then do the test and save the result. To add results for a different End setting 302 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End 1/End 2 control to make it show the correct end. Chapter 13: Test Results How to Replace a Saved Result that Failed If the ID set has a Last ID, the ID list under IDs Untested shows the IDs that do not have results for the end you selected. If the ID set does not have a Last ID, tap the Next ID box, then enter the first ID for the set of saved results. 3 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap DONE. 4 Tap TEST or press , then save the result. To add results from a different test 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap a test, then tap USE SELECTED. 3 If the ID set has a Last ID, the home screen shows the first ID in the set that does not have results for the test you selected. If the ID set does not have a Last ID, tap the Next ID panel, tap the Next ID box on the CHANGE ID screen, enter the first ID for the set of saved results, then on the CHANGE ID screen, tap DONE. Tap TEST or press , then save the result. How to Replace a Saved Result that Failed To use the same test settings that were used for the saved result 1 On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. 2 On the RESULTS screen, tap a result that failed. 3 Tap TEST AGAIN. 4 When the test is completed, and if Auto Save is on, the tester asks you if you want to overwrite the results. Tap Yes. If Auto Save is off, tap FIX LATER (if the test failed) or SAVE (if the test passed) to save the result. 303 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To replace a result with a result that uses different test settings 1 Turn off Auto Save. 2 Make sure that the home screen shows the project that contains the result you want to replace. 3 Select the necessary test settings. 4 Do the test, tap FIX LATER (if the test failed) or SAVE (if the test passed), then enter the ID of the saved result. 5 The tester asks you if you want to overwrite the results. Tap Yes. Delete, Rename, and Move Results Before you delete, rename, or move results, select the project that contains the results and go to the MANAGE RESULTS screen: 1 On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. The RESULTS screen shows the results in the active project. 2 To see the results in another project, tap VIEW ALL, then tap a project. 3 Tap MANAGE to see the MANAGE RESULTS screen. To delete results 1 On the MANAGE RESULTS screen, select the results you want to delete. To select all the tests that failed or all the tests that passed, tap Select All Retests or Select All Passes. 2 Tap DELETE, then tap DELETE in the confirmation dialog. To rename results 304 1 On the MANAGE RESULTS screen, select one result to rename. 2 Tap RENAME. 3 Enter a new name, then tap DONE. Chapter 13: Test Results Manage Results on a Flash Drive To move results to a different project 1 On the MANAGE RESULTS screen, select the results you want to move. 2 Tap MOVE. To move the results to a project shown in the list, tap the project name, then tap MOVE in the confirmation dialog. To make a new project and move the results to the new project, tap NEW PROJECT, enter a project name, tap DONE, then tap MOVE in the confirmation dialog. Note When you move results to a different project, that project becomes the active project. Manage Results on a Flash Drive You can export or import results to or from a flash drive, and delete results on the flash drive. Caution Do not remove the USB flash drive while the LED on the drive flashes. Doing so can corrupt the data on the drive. You can lose a USB flash drive, cause damage to it, or accidentally erase the contents of the drive. Thus, Fluke Networks recommends that you save no more than one day of test results on a flash drive. Note The tester reads only USB drives that use the FAT format. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the type A USB port. The tester makes a bell sound when it detects the drive. 2 On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. -continued- 305 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 3 The RESULTS screen shows the results in the active project. To upload results from a different project, tap VIEW ALL then tap a project. 4 Tap TRANSFER. 5 On the TRANSFER RESULTS screen, select a function: Export: On the EXPORT RESULTS screen, select New or All, select the project that contains the results you want to export to the flash drive, then tap EXPORT. New: Export only results that do not have the same IDs as results that are already on the flash drive. All: Export all the results from all projects in the tester. Note Cable IDs are case-sensitive. For example, the tester saves result with the names “A0” and “a0” in two different records. If you select the active project, the EXPORT RESULTS screen shows the percentage of tests completed for the project and the percentage of results already uploaded to a flash drive. Import: On the IMPORT RESULTS screen select the project that contains the results you want to import from the flash drive, then tap IMPORT. Delete: On the DELETE RESULTS screen select the project that contains the results you want to delete on the flash drive, then tap DELETE. Upload Results to a PC To upload results to a PC from the tester or a flash drive, use LinkWare software. 306 1 Install the latest version of LinkWare software on the PC. 2 Turn on the tester and start LinkWare on the PC. 3 Use the USB cable supplied to connect the Micro-AB USB port on the tester to a type A USB port on the PC. See Figure 68. Chapter 13: Test Results Upload Results to a PC 4 Or connect a USB flash drive to the PC. 5 On the LinkWare toolbar, click , then select the name of the installed module to upload from a tester, or Test Files (.tst) to upload from a flash drive. 6 In the Import dialog box in LinkWare, select options for the location and the number of results to import. AC adapter Type A USB port Micro-AB USB port Figure 68. How to Connect the Tester to a PC GPU46.EPS 307 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook View the Memory Status To see the memory status On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Memory Status. The MEMORY STATUS screen shows these values: The percentage of memory available The number of test records that are saved The number of .id files that have been downloaded to the tester from LinkWare software The memory space taken by other files, such as the databases for projects and test limits For information on memory capacity, see “Internal Memory for Test Results” on page 390. 308 Chapter 14: Projects Why Use Projects? Projects help you monitor the status of a job and make sure that your work agrees with the requirements of the job. You can use a project to do these tasks: Specify the tests that are necessary for a job. Specify settings for tests. Specify an operator for the job. Make sets of sequential IDs to use as names for test results. Automatically save test results with IDs from a set. Add the results from other necessary tests to each saved result in the project. See which IDs do not have results for a specified test. See what percentage of a job is completed. See how many links passed and how many failed. Keep the test results from a job in one place for easy access. When you use a project, you can do tests and use IDs that are not specified in the project if necessary. You can also easily change the settings in a project if necessary. Note It is not necessary to install a module to set up a project for the module. The tester keeps all settings in the main Versiv unit. 309 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Tutorial: Make a New Project To start a new project, tap the PROJECT panel on the home screen. Figure 69 shows the PROJECT screen and describes the items you enter to make a project. The tester can have up to 100 projects. A B C D E J F J G H I Figure 69. PROJECT Screen GPU08.EPS The name of the project. See also item . Operator: The name of the person who will do the tests for the project. The date range for the results in the project. 310 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project Results: A summary of the test results in the project: : The number of tests that failed. : The number of tests that passed. : The number of results from tests on twisted pair cable that have measurements within the range of accuracy uncertainty for the tester. See “PASS*/FAIL* Results” on page 79. To see the results, tap the panel. Test Setup: The tests that are necessary for each cable in the project. To add a test to the project, tap NEW TEST. For information about twisted pair test settings, see Chapter 3. For information about OTDR test settings, see Chapter 9. Cable ID Sets: The sets of IDs the tester can use for the names of test results. Each ID set is for either copper or fiber cable. To add a set of IDs to the project, tap NEW ID SET. See “How to Make ID Sets” on page 337. To use a different project, tap CHANGE PROJECT, then tap a project. To make a new project, tap CHANGE PROJECT, then tap NEW PROJECT. TRANSFER lets you export or import projects to or from a flash drive, and delete projects on the flash drive. The project data includes all project settings and test results. MANAGE lets you rename, copy, or delete a project that is in the tester: Rename: Lets you give the project a new name. The tester saves all the settings and test results in the project with the new name. Copy: Lets you use the settings in the project to start a new project. The tester does not put test results into the new project. 311 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Delete: Lets you delete the project and all the test results in the project. The tester shows a warning if you have uploaded less than 100% of the results to a PC. To delete the test setup or ID set, tap . To copy the test setup or ID set so you can edit it to make a new one, tap . Notes If you delete an imported ID set from a project, the ID set is still available in the tester. To delete imported ID sets from the tester, use LinkWare software. See “Delete an Imported ID Set” on page 341. A project must have at least one Test Setup and one Cable ID set. If you delete them all, the tester makes a default Test Setup and Cable ID set. Step 1: Give the Project a Name 1-1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. The PROJECT screen shows the active project. 1-2. Tap CHANGE PROJECT, then tap NEW PROJECT. 1-3. Use the keyboard to enter a name for the project, then tap DONE. Step 2: Specify an Operator The operator is the person who will use the project to do a job. 2-1 312 On the PROJECT screen, tap the Operator panel, then select or add an operator: To select a different operator, then tap a name in the OPERATOR list. To add an operator to the list, tap NEW OPERATOR, use the keyboard to enter a name, then tap DONE. To delete an operator, tap DELETE, tap one or more names, then tap DELETE again. Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project 2-2. To go back to the PROJECT screen, tap the name of the operator you want to use. Step 3: Set up Tests for the Project A project includes the tests and settings for the tests that are necessary for a job. If you do not specify settings for a test, the tester uses the default settings. For this tutorial, your project will include tests for twisted pair cable and fiber optic cable. It is not necessary to attach a copper or fiber module before you set up a test for that module. To set up a twisted pair test for the project 3-1 On the PROJECT screen, tap NEW TEST. 3-2. If the TEST SETUP screen does not show the DSX-5000 module, tap Module. If a module is not attached, the MODULE screen shows. On the MODULE screen, tap DSX-5000. 3-3. On the TEST SETUP screen, select and change the test settings as necessary for a test on twisted pair cable. For information about twisted pair test settings, see “Settings for Twisted Pair Tests” on page 13. 3-4. When you have completed your selections for the twisted pair cable test, tap SAVE on the TEST SETUP screen. To set up an fiber loss/length test for the project 3-5. On the PROJECT screen, tap NEW TEST. 3-6. If the TEST SETUP screen does not show a CertiFiber Pro module, tap Module. If a module is not attached, the MODULE screen shows. On the MODULE screen, tap a CertiFIber Pro OTDR module. (continued) 313 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 3-7. On the TEST SETUP screen, make sure the Test Type shows Smart Remote. If it does not, tap Test Type, then tap Smart Remote. 3-8. On the TEST SETUP screen, select and change the test settings as necessary for the loss/length test. For this tutorial, set Bi-Directional to Off. For information about other loss/length test settings, see “Settings for Loss/Length Tests” on page 20. 3-9. When you have completed your selections for the Smart Remote test, tap SAVE on the TEST SETUP screen. To set up an OTDR test for the project 3-10. On the PROJECT screen, tap NEW TEST. 3-11. If the TEST SETUP screen does not show an OptiFiber Pro module, tap Module. If a module is not attached, the MODULE screen shows. On the MODULE screen, tap an OptiFiber Pro OTDR module. 3-12. On the TEST SETUP screen, make sure the Test Type shows Auto OTDR. If it does not, tap Test Type, then tap Auto OTDR. 3-13. On the TEST SETUP screen, select and change the test settings as necessary for the Auto OTDR test. For information about OTDR test settings, see “Settings for OTDR Tests” on page 11. For this tutorial, set Launch Compensation to Off. 3-14. When you have completed your selections for the Auto OTDR test, tap SAVE on the TEST SETUP screen. 314 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project Step 4: Make ID Sets for Twisted Pair and Fiber Cabling To see the CABLE ID SETUP screen On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, then tap NEW ID SET on the PROJECT screen. Or, on the home screen, tap the Next ID panel, tap CHANGE CABLE IDs, then tap NEW ID SET on the CHANGE CABLE IDs screen (see Figure 70 on page 317). When you make cable ID sets, you set up these items for the project (see Figure 71 on page 318): Sets of IDs to use when you save test results. For example, you can make one set of IDs for multimode fibers and another for twisted pair copper cables. For projects that use an OptiFiber Pro or CertiFiber Pro module, you specify the tests to do for each ID. As you use the project, the tester shows the percentage of the necessary tests you have completed. It also shows the IDs that do not have results for each test. For this tutorial, your project will include ID sets for 12 twisted pair cables and 10 fiber optic cables (5 duplex fiber links). It is not necessary to attach a copper or fiber module before you set up an ID set for that module. To make a cable ID set for tests on twisted pair cabling 4-1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, then tap NEW ID SET on the PROJECT screen. 4-2. For this tutorial, you will make an ID set that has 12 IDs for twisted pair cabling: a. On the CABLE ID SETUP screen (Figure 71 on page 318), tap the box under First ID, use the keyboard to enter B-00. b. Tap the box under Last ID, use the keyboard to enter D-03, then tap DONE. (continued) 315 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook c. Make sure that Copper is selected under Select Media. Note You can use ID sets you make for copper media only when you do tests on copper cabling. d. Tap REVIEW. The CABLE ID REVIEW screen shows the ID set and the total number of IDs. 4-3. To save the ID set, tap SAVE on the CABLE ID REVIEW screen. To make a cable ID set for tests on fiber cabling 4-4. On PROJECT screen, tap NEW ID SET. 4-5. For this tutorial, you will make an ID set that has 10 IDs for 5 duplex fiber links: a. On the CABLE ID SETUP screen (Figure 71 on page 318), tap the box under First ID, use the keyboard to enter 1A. b. Tap the box under Last ID, use the keyboard to enter 5B, then tap DONE. c. Under Select Media, tap Fiber. The screen shows the tests you can do with the OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro modules. The tester uses these settings to calculate how many tests you have completed in the project. d. Tap End 1 and End 2 for the OTDR test and tap the Loss/ Length test. Note You can use ID sets you make for fiber media only when you do tests on fiber cabling. e. Tap REVIEW. The CABLE ID REVIEW screen shows the ID set, the total number of IDs, and the tests you specified for the ID set. 4-6. To save the ID set, tap SAVE on the CABLE ID REVIEW screen. 4-7. On the PROJECT screen, delete the default ID set Next ID: 001. 316 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project A B C D E F Figure 70. CHANGE CABLE IDs Screen GPU90.EPS The screen shows the ID sets, copper or fiber, for the type of test setup that shows on the home screen. The ID set “001” is the default set the tester makes if no other ID sets are in the project To select an ID set, tap the ID set. To add an ID set to the project, tap NEW ID SET. To edit an ID set, tap the set, then tap EDIT. To use the selected ID set, tap USE SELECTED. 317 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B C G D E F Figure 71. CABLE ID SETUP Screen (after you enter the first and last IDs) GPU56.EPS First ID and Last ID: The first and last IDs in a set of sequential IDs. See “How to Make ID Sets” on page 337. If you do not enter a Last ID when you make an ID set, the tester will increment the First ID to make subsequent IDs. When you use an ID set that does not have a Last ID, the set under IDs Untested on the CHANGE ID screen shows only the next ID. Note The tester does not increment symbols or accented characters. Total IDs: The number of IDs in the set. This section does not show for ID sets that do not have a Last ID. Select Media: Select the type of module, Copper or Fiber, that you will use when you use this ID set. 318 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project Notes The Select Media section does not show for ID sets that do not have a Last ID. ID sets are available only for tests on the media type you selected for the ID set. Tap IMPORT to use an ID set that you downloaded to the tester from LinkWare software. Tap REVIEW to see the CABLE ID REVIEW screen, which shows the ID set an the total number of IDs. See “How to Make ID Sets” on page 337. Note The REVIEW button is not available if you do not enter a Last ID. SAVE: To save the ID set, tap SAVE. When you select Fiber media for tests that use a CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro module, select the tests that are necessary for each fiber in the ID set. For example, you can specify that you must do a Loss/Length test and a FiberInspector test for each ID. After you do both tests for all the IDs in the set, the tester shows 100% Tested on the home screen. If no IDs include FiberInspector results, the tester shows 50%. To see the IDs that need FiberInspector results, select a FiberInspector test in the project, then look at the list under FiberInspector IDs Untested on the CHANGE ID screen (item in Figure 72). Note When you select a test in the Fiber section, be sure to add that test to the project. See “Step 3: Set up Tests for the Project” on page 313. 319 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 5: Give Names to the Ends of the Fiber for OTDR Tests Names let you identify the location of the fiber ends when you do tests with an OTDR module. For example, End 1 is in the telecommunications closet and End 2 is in a work area. 5-1 On the home screen, if the test type panel does not show the Auto OTDR test, tap the panel, tap the Auto OTDR test, then tap USE SELECTED. 5-2. On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel, then on the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End 1: panel. See Figure 72. 5-3. On the EDIT END NAME screen, tap the field for End 1, then use the keyboard to enter a name for End 1. 5-4. Tap the field for End 2, use the keyboard to enter a name for End 2, then tap DONE. 5-5. On the CHANGE ID screen, make sure that the End 1/End 2 control at the top of the screen shows the end where you will do the test (End 1 for this tutorial). Step 6: Turn on the Auto Save Function When Auto Save is on, the tester automatically saves results with the next available ID. If a test fails, you can do the test again for the same ID if necessary, or do a test for the next ID. 6-1 On the CHANGE ID screen, make sure that the Auto Save control shows On. 6-2. Tap DONE. 320 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: Make a New Project I A B C D E H F G GPU01.EPS Figure 72. CHANGE ID Screen for Tests on Twisted Pair and Single Fibers Note The CHANGE ID screen for Smart Remote Mode shows the Input Fiber ID and Output Fiber ID. See 76 on page 331. Auto Save: When a test is completed, the tester automatically saves the results with the next ID from the ID set. If the test failed, you can do the test again for the same ID, or go to the next cable. If you go to the next cable, the tester shows the failed test at the top of the list of results for the ID set. Next ID: The Next ID is the ID that the tester gives to the next results you save. 321 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To edit the ID, tap the ID, use the keyboard to edit the ID, then tap DONE. If the ID is not in the current set, the tester will make a new ID set that uses the ID as the first ID. To select a different ID from the set of untested IDs, tap the ID in the set (). End 1:, End 2: When you select a fiber ID set for tests with an OptiFiber Pro OTDR module or for tests on single fibers with a CertiFiber Pro OLTS module, this panel shows the name for the ends of the fiber. The tester uses the names when you save results for each end of the fiber. To edit the name for the end shown, tap the panel. To change the end that is shown, tap the End 1/End 2 control (item ). IDs Untested: The number of IDs that do not have results. For fiber IDs, the list shows the IDs that do not have results for the test shown (Auto OTDR in this example) and the End selected (item ). This list shows IDs that do not have results. For fiber IDs, the list shows the IDs that do not have results for the test shown and the End selected. On the home screen, the tester shows 100% Tested when this list shows no IDs for all test types specified in the project. When you use a Next ID set, which does not have a Last ID, the tester does not know how many IDs are necessary for the ID set. For Next ID sets, this list shows only the next ID. Tap CHANGE CABLE IDs to select a different ID set to use or to edit an ID set. Tap DONE to save your changes and go back to the previous screen. Tap this bar or move your finger up or down the bar to scroll to a different place in the list. End 1/End 2 control: When you select a fiber ID set for tests with an OptiFiber Pro OTDR module or for tests on single fibers with a CertiFiber Pro OLTS module, this control lets you select an end of the fiber so you can enter a name for the end (item ) and do tests from that end of the fiber. 322 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with a CableAnalyzer Module Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with a CableAnalyzer Module This tutorial assumes that you completed the tutorial “Make a New Project” on page 310. Figure 74 shows the minimum equipment necessary for this tutorial. B A C D GPU101.EPS Main and remote Versiv units with DSX CableAnalyzer modules installed Two channel adapters Twisted pair cable AC adapters with line cords (optional) Equipment for the Twisted Pair Project Tutorial Step 1: Attach a CableAnalyzer Module Attach a DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer module. See “How to Remove or Install a Module” on page 28. Step 2: Select a Project If the correct project name does not show on the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, tap CHANGE PROJECT, tap the name of a project, then tap DONE. 323 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 3: Select a Test for Twisted Pair Cable On the home screen, tap the test type panel, on the CHANGE TEST screen (Figure 73), tap the test you made for twisted pair cable, then tap USE SELECTED. If the active ID set was not made for copper media, the tester shows a warning. When you tap OK, the tester shows the CHANGE CABLE IDs screen. Select the copper ID set that starts with B-00, which you made in the previous tutorial. A B C D Figure 73. CHANGE TEST Screen To select a test, tap the test. To add a test to the project, tap NEW TEST. 324 GPU54.EPS Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with a CableAnalyzer Module To edit a test, tap the test, then tap EDIT. Note Test limits are not applicable to the FaultMap test. Test limits and fiber types are not applicable to the FiberInspector test. To do the selected test, tap USE SELECTED, then tap TEST or press . Step 4: Do an Autotest 4-1 Attach the correct adapters to the main and remote testers. 4-2. Connect the testers to the cabling. To do an Autotest without connections to installed cabling, connect the main and remote testers together with two channel adapters and twisted pair cable. 4-3. Tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results with the first ID in the set (B-00 in this example). Step 5: Monitor the Status of Your Project The home screen shows % Tested, which is the percentage completed of the total number of tests you must do for the project. For example, in this tutorial you set up IDs with 42 tests total: 10 fiber IDs with OTDR End 1 and End 2 and Loss Length tests in each ID, for a total of 30 fiber tests. 12 copper IDs (you can save one copper Autotest in each ID) Total tests: 42 If you did one Autotest on twisted pair for ID “B-00” as instructed by this tutorial, the % Tested shows 2% (1 test completed out of 42 total for the project). 325 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro Modules This tutorial assumes that you completed the tutorial “Make a New Project” on page 310. In this tutorial, you will do OTDR tests on both fibers of a duplex fiber link, then you will add loss/length results to the OTDR results for the two fibers. Figures 74 and 75 show the equipment necessary for this tutorial. Note Select launch/tail cords and test reference cords that have the correct connectors to connect to the OTDR and OLTS modules and to the fiber link or segment. D B C A Fiber 1A Fiber 1B End 1 Fiber 1A Fiber 1B E End 2 GPU159.EPS Main Versiv unit with OTDR module installed Launch and tail cords (match the fiber to be tested) Fiber cleaning supplies AC adapter with line cord (optional) Duplex fiber link or segment Figure 74. Equipment for the OTDR Project Tutorial 326 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro B C D A E F G Fiber 1A Fiber 1B End 1 H End 2 Fiber 1A Fiber 1B GPU160.EPS Main and remote Versiv units with CertiFiber Pro modules installed Fiber cleaning supplies Video probe with USB connector (DI-1000 shown) For multimode fiber: two EF-TRC AC adapters with line cords test reference cords Two singlemode adapters For multimode fiber: two test (optional) Duplex fiber link or segment reference cords. For singlemode fiber: four test reference cords. Figure 75. Equipment for the Loss/Length Project Tutorial 327 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 1: Attach an OptiFiber Pro Module Attach an OTDR module, such as the OptiFiber Pro Quad OTDR module, to the main Versiv unit. See “How to Remove or Install a Module” on page 25. Step 2: Select a Project If the correct project name does not show on the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, tap CHANGE PROJECT, tap the name of a project, then tap DONE. Step 3: Select an OTDR Test On the home screen, tap the test type panel, on the CHANGE TEST screen (Figure 73), tap the Auto OTDR test you made, then tap USE SELECTED. If the active ID set was not made for fiber media, the tester shows a warning. When you tap OK, the tester shows the CHANGE CABLE IDs screen, where you can select the correct ID set. Step 4: Select the Correct ID and Fiber End if Necessary The Next ID panel on the home screen shows the ID and fiber end that the tester will use the next time you save results. If the panel does not show the Next ID as 1A and End 1, select those settings: To select a different ID set or fiber end Tap the Next ID panel. 328 To select a different ID set, tap CHANGE CABLE IDs, tap the correct ID set, then tap USE SELECTED. To select a different fiber end, tap the End 1/End 2 control at the top of the CHANGE CABLE IDs screen to make it show the correct end. Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro Step 5: Do OTDR Tests on End 1 of the Link 5-1 Clean and inspect all fiber connectors. 5-2. Connect the launch cord to the tester and to End 1 of fiber 1A. Connect the tail cord to the other end of fiber 1A. 5-3. Tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results for End 1 in ID 1A. 5-4. Connect the launch cord to the tester and to End 1 of fiber 1B. Connect the tail cord to the other end of fiber 1B. 5-5. Tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results for End 1 in ID 1B. Step 6: Do OTDR Tests on End 2 of the Link 6-1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 6-2. On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the End 1/End 2 control to make End 2 show. 6-3. In the ID set under IDs Untested, the ID 1A is highlighted because it is the first ID in the set that does not contain OTDR results for End 2. 6-4. Tap DONE. 6-5. Clean and inspect all fiber connectors. 6-6. Connect the launch cord to the tester and to End 2 of fiber 1A. Connect the tail cord to the other end of fiber 1A. 6-7. Tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results for End 2 with the End 1 results in ID 1A. 6-8. Connect the launch cord to the tester and to End 2 of fiber 1B. Connect the tail cord to the other end of fiber 1B. 6-9. Tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results for End 2 with the End 1 results in ID 1B. 329 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Step 7: Add Results from a Loss/Length Test Select the loss/length test to do next on fibers 1A and 1B. 7-1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 7-2. On the CHANGE TEST screen (Figure 73), tap the Smart Remote test, then tap USE SELECTED. 7-3. Attach CertiFiber Pro modules to the main and remote Versiv units. 7-4. On the home screen, the Next ID panel shows the first two IDs, 1A and 1B, that do not contain loss/length results. To see how the tester uses the IDs for the fibers connected to its INPUT and OUTPUT ports, tap the panel (Figure 76 on page 331). 7-5. Clean and inspect the connectors on the tester, remote, and test reference cords. 7-6. To set the reference for the fiber test and make sure your test reference cords are good, tap SET REF, tap RUN WIZARD, then do the steps given by the wizard. Note When you make connections to the fiber link, make sure you connect fiber 1A to the main tester’s INPUT port and fiber 1B to the main tester’s OUTPUT port. 7-7. When you have completed the reference and TRC verification procedures and connected the testers to the fiber link, tap TEST or press . When the test is completed and if it passed, the tester automatically saves the results for the Smart Remote test with the OTDR results in IDs 1A and 1B. Figure 77 on page 332 shows the RESULTS screen for the tests completed for this project. 330 Chapter 14: Projects Tutorial: How to Use a Project for Tests with OptiFiber Pro and CertiFiber Pro A B Figure 76. CHANGE ID Screen for Smart Remote Mode GPU161.EPS Input Fiber ID and Output Fiber ID show the IDs for the fibers connected to the testers INPUT and OUTPUT ports at the end of the test. To see the input or output fiber IDs that have not been tested, tap the Input Fiber ID or Output Fiber ID window. To select or edit an ID set or to make a new ID set, tap CHANGE CABLE IDs. 331 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook A B B C Figure 77. Copper, OTDR, and Loss/Length Saved in a Project GPU162.EPS Total number of tests saved in the project. IDs1B and 1A each contain results from a loss/length test and from OTDR tests on Ends 1 and 2. ID B-00 contains results from a twisted pair test. 332 Chapter 14: Projects How to Change Settings as You Use a Project Step 8: Monitor the Status of Your Project The home screen shows % Tested, which is the percentage completed of the total number of tests you must do for the project. In this tutorial you set up IDs for 42 tests total (see page 325), and have completed these tests: One Autotest on twisted pair for ID B-00 Four OTDR tests: End 1 and End 2 for each fiber ID 1A and 1B Two Loss/length tests: one for each fiber ID 1A and 1B Total tests completed: 7 % Tested on the home screen shows 17% (7 tests completed out of 42 total for the project) To see the IDs that do not have results for a test, tap the Next ID panel on the home screen. If the tester is in Smart Remote mode, next tap the Input Fiber ID or Output Fiber ID window. For a list of fiber IDs, the ID list under IDs Untested shows the IDs that do not have results for the End selected at the top of the screen and the Test Type shown. For a list of copper IDs, the ID list shows the IDs that you have not used. How to Change Settings as You Use a Project To Change the ID Sometimes you must use an ID that is not the next ID in the set, an ID that is not in the ID set, or an ID you used before. You can change the ID on the CHANGE ID screen before you do a test or enter the ID on the SAVE RESULT screen after you do a test. 333 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To Use a Different, Unused ID from an ID Set that Has a First and Last ID If Auto Save is on or off: 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap an ID in the list under IDs Untested, then tap DONE. 3 Do the test. After you save the results, the tester uses the next ID in the set for the next results. If Auto Save is off: 1 Do the test, then tap SAVE if the test passed or FIX LATER if the test failed. 2 Enter the ID on the SAVE RESULT screen, then tap SAVE. After you save the results, the tester uses the next ID in the set for the next results. To Use an ID You Used Before If the test failed before, turn on Auto Save, select the saved result on the RESULTS screen, then tap TEST AGAIN or press . See “How to Make ID Sets” on page 337. If the test passed before, do the test again, then enter the ID on the SAVE RESULT screen. To Use an ID that is Not in an ID Set that Has a First and Last ID If Auto Save is on or off: 334 1 On the home screen, tap the Next ID panel. 2 On the CHANGE ID screen, tap the panel that shows the Next ID. 3 Use the keyboard to enter an ID, then tap DONE on the keyboard. 4 The tester asks you if you want to create a new ID set (see “About Next ID Sets” on page 339). Tap YES in the dialog box, then tap DONE. Chapter 14: Projects How to Change Settings as You Use a Project 5 Do a test. The tester saves the results with the ID you entered. It saves subsequent results with the IDs from the new set. To use IDs from the set you used before, go the CHANGE ID screen, tap CHANGE CABLE IDs, tap the ID set, then tap USE SELECTED. If Auto Save is off: 1 Do the test, then tap SAVE if the test passed or FIX LATER if the test failed. 2 Enter an ID on the SAVE RESULT screen, then tap SAVE. The tester saves the result with the ID you entered. The next ID the tester uses is the next ID from the set. If the ID you used is in another set in the project, the tester removes that ID from the IDs Untested list for the same type of test. If the ID you used is not in any set in the project, and the project contains one or more sets that have first and last IDs, the % Tested value includes test you saved with the ID. For example, if you have one set with 10 IDs, and you save 1 result with an ID that is not on the set, the % Tested shows 9% (1 saved result divided by 11 IDs). To Change the ID when the Set Has Only a Next ID You can change the ID on the CHANGE ID screen before you do the test. Or, you can turn off Auto Save, then enter an ID on the SAVE RESULT screen after you do the test. For both methods, the tester changes the set to use the ID you entered as the Next ID. To Change the Tests in a Project When you use a project, you usually do only the tests that the project specifies. You select these tests from the list on the CHANGE TEST screen in the project. If necessary, you can add a test to the project or change the settings for a test in the project. 335 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To Select a Different Test that is in the Project 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen tap the test you want to do. See Figure 73 on page 324. 3 Tap USE SELECTED. To Add a Test to a Project 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel or the PROJECT panel. 2 Tap NEW TEST. 3 On the TEST TYPE screen, tap a test. 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, change the test settings as necessary, then tap SAVE. To Include a Fiber Test in the % Tested Value If you add an OptiFiber Pro OTDR, CertiFiber Pro loss length, FiberInspector, or FaultMap test to a project, but do not select the test on the CABLE ID SETUP, EDIT CABLE IDs, or IMPORTED IDs screen, the results you save for the test do not affect the % Tested value.To include a test in the % Tested value 336 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, then on the PROJECT screen, tap a fiber ID set that has a First and Last ID. 2 On the EDIT CABLE IDs screen, or the IMPORTED IDs screen (for ID sets downloaded from LinkWare), select the test under Select Fiber Tests. 3 Tap SAVE, then tap DONE, or for IMPORTED IDs, tap DONE then tap DONE again. Chapter 14: Projects How to Make ID Sets To Change the Settings for a Test in the Project 1 If the test you want to change does not show on the home screen, tap the test setup panel, tap the test, then tap USE SELECTED. 2 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 3 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the test, then tap EDIT 4 Use the TEST SETUP screen to make changes to the test settings. Note If you change the Test Type, and the test you select is not selected on the CABLE ID SETUP, EDIT CABLE IDs, or IMPORTED IDs screen, the results you save will not affect the % Tested value. 5 When you have completed your selections, tap SAVE. To Save Results in a Different or New Project To save results in a different or new project, press home, tap the project panel, then tap CHANGE PROJECT. Select a different project, or tap NEW PROJECT to start a new project. How to Make ID Sets There are two methods you can use to make ID sets: Make sets of sequential IDs on the tester. Make sets of sequential IDs in LinkWare software, download them to the tester, then import them into a project on the tester. These sets can include non-sequential IDs. To make a set of sequential IDs, you enter the first and last ID in the set. The tester (or LinkWare software) increments the letters and numbers in the first ID from right to left to make a set of IDs that starts with your first ID and ends with your last ID. Special characters, letters with accents, and letters that are the same in the first and last IDs do not increment. 337 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook For example, here is an installation with eight fibers: Two rooms: rooms 17 and 18 Two fiber cables in each room: cables 1 and 2 Two fibers in each cable: fibers A and B You can make this ID set for the installation: First ID: ROOM 17 FIBER 1A Last ID: ROOM 18 FIBER 2B These IDs make this set of eight IDs: ROOM 17 FIBER 1A ROOM 17 FIBER 1B ROOM 17 FIBER 2A ROOM 17 FIBER 2B ROOM 18 FIBER 1A ROOM 18 FIBER 1B ROOM 18 FIBER 2A ROOM 18 FIBER 2B Each project can have up to 5000 IDs. If an ID set does not have a Last ID, the tester counts the set as one ID. An ID can have a maximum of 60 characters. To make an ID set Note When you make an ID set, the tester saves it in the project shown on the home screen. 338 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. 2 On the PROJECT screen, tap NEW ID SET. 3 On the CABLE ID SETUP screen, tap the First ID panel, then use the keyboard to enter the first ID for the set. Chapter 14: Projects How to Make ID Sets 4 Tap the Last ID panel, use the keyboard to enter the last ID for the set, then tap DONE. Note If you do not enter a Last ID, the tester uses the first ID as the Next ID and increments that ID each time you save a result. See “About Next ID Sets” on page 339. 5 To specify the tests that are necessary for each ID in the set, select the tests under Select Fiber Tests. See Figure 71 on page 318. 6 To see the ID set, tap REVIEW. 7 On the CABLE ID REVIEW screen or the CABLE ID SETUP screen, tap Save. About Next ID Sets Next ID sets have one ID that the tester increments each time you do a test. To make a Next ID set, do not enter a Last ID when you make an ID set. Numbers increment sequentially: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, ... 99, 100, 101... Letters increment through the English alphabet: A, B, C, D, ... Z, AA, AB, AC, AD, ... AZ, BA, BB, BC... Numbers and letters do not cause each other to increment: 1Y, 1Z, 1AA, 1AB, ... 1ZZ, 1AAA, 1AAB... The tester does not increment symbols or accented characters. When you use a Next ID set, the set under IDs Untested on the CHANGE ID screen shows only the next ID. To save the next test with a different ID, tap the Next ID: panel, then enter a different ID. Each project can have one Next ID set. 339 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook If your project has only a Next ID set, the tester cannot calculate the percentage of the project that is completed, so the % Tested value does not show on the home screen. If your project has both a Next ID set and sets with first and last IDs, the % Tested value includes tests you saved with Next ID. For example, if you have one Next ID set and one set with 10 IDs, and you save 10 results with next IDs, the % Tested shows 50% (10 saved results divided by 20 IDs). Import an ID Set into a Project You can use LinkWare software to make ID sets, download them to the tester, then import them into projects. Note ID sets that you download to the tester must have the extension “.ids”. To import an ID set 1 In LinkWare, select Utilities > (module name) > Create ID List to make an ID set and download it to the tester. See the online help in LinkWare for instructions. 2 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. 3 Make sure the correct project shows on the PROJECT screen. If necessary, tap CHANGE PROJECT to select a new project. 4 On the PROJECT screen tap NEW ID SET, then tap IMPORT. 5 On the IMPORT CABLE ID screen, tap the ID set you downloaded. 6 Under Select Media, tap Copper or Fiber to specify the type of tests that will use the IDs. For IDs for fiber tests: Under Fiber, select the tests that are necessary for the project. These selections let you use the % Tested value on the home screen to monitor the progress of the project. 7 340 Tap IMPORT. Chapter 14: Projects How to Manage Projects Delete an Imported ID Set If you go to the PROJECT screen and delete a cable ID set that you imported into the project, the ID set is still available in the tester. To delete an imported ID set from the tester Use the Create ID List utility in the latest version of LinkWare to delete the ID set. See the online help in LinkWare for instructions. How to Manage Projects View Results in a Project On the home screen, tap the RESULTS icon. To see the results from a different project, tap VIEW ALL, then tap a project name. For more information on results, see Chapter 13. Rename a Project 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, tap MANAGE, then tap Rename. 2 Use the keyboard to edit the name, then tap DONE. Note You cannot rename the DEFAULT project. Copy a Project to Make a New Project You can copy any project for any module and change the settings to make a new project for any module. It is not necessary to install the module to edit a project that uses the module. When you copy a project, the new project does not contain the test results from the project you copied. 341 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To copy a project 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel, tap MANAGE, then tap Copy. 2 Use the keyboard to enter a name for the project, then tap DONE. Delete a Project 1 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. 2 Make sure the project you want to delete is the active project. If it is not, tap CHANGE PROJECT, then select the project you want to delete. 3 On the PROJECT screen, tap MANAGE, then tap Delete. The tester shows a warning if you have not uploaded all of the results to a PC. Tap DELETE to delete the project. Note You cannot delete the DEFAULT project. Manage Projects on a Flash Drive You can export or import projects to or from a flash drive, and delete projects on the flash drive. The project data includes all project settings and test results. Caution 342 Do not remove the USB flash drive while the LED on the drive flashes. Doing so can corrupt the data on the drive. You can lose a USB flash drive, cause damage to it, or accidentally erase the contents of the drive. Thus, Fluke Networks recommends that you save no more than one day of test results on a flash drive. Chapter 14: Projects How to Manage Projects Note The tester reads only USB drives that use the FAT format. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the type A USB port. The tester makes a bell sound when it detects the drive. 2 On the home screen, tap the PROJECT panel. 3 On the PROJECT screen, tap TRANSFER. 4 On the TRANSFER PROJECTS screen, select a function: Export: On the EXPORT PROJECTS screen, select the projects you want to export to the flash drive, then tap EXPORT. Import: On the IMPORT PROJECTS screen select the projects you want to import from the flash drive, then tap IMPORT. Delete: On the DELETE PROJECTS screen select the projects you want to delete on the flash drive, then tap DELETE. Copy Project Settings to Other Testers To copy the settings in a project to other Versiv units, use the Read Project Setups and Write Project Setups utilities in LinkWare software. You can use LinkWare to read project settings from a tester or from a project you exported to a flash drive. 343 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 344 Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits How to Make a Custom Twisted Pair Cable Type If a twisted pair cable installation has a cable type that is not in the list of types in the tester, you can make a custom cable type for the job. A custom twisted pair cable type has these settings: Custom cable name Standard cable type used for default values NVP (nominal velocity of propagation) You can make up to 20 custom cable types. The tester keeps custom cable types with the other cable types in the main Versiv unit (not in the module). The names of custom cable types have an asterisk (*) at the start and end. Use the values specified by the cable manufacturer to make the custom cable type. To make a custom cable type 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap a copper test, then tap EDIT. Note You must select a test before you make a custom cable type, but you can use the cable type in any test that supports the category of the cable. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Cable Type, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap MANAGE. -continued- 345 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 4 On the MANAGE CUSTOM screen, tap the Create panel. 5 On the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen, tap Enter New Cable Name, use the keyboard to enter a name, then tap DONE. 6 On the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen, tap the panel under Use default values from:, then select a cable type to use for default values for your custom cable. 7 On the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen, tap the NVP panel to change the NVP value if necessary. See the next section for instructions. 8 When you have entered all necessary values, tap SAVE on the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen. The tester adds an asterisk (*) to the start and end of the custom cable name. How to Change the NVP The tester uses an NVP value (nominal velocity of propagation) and the signal delay through a cable to calculate the length of copper cabling. The default value specified by the selected cable type is the typical NVP for that cable type. The default value is usually accurate enough for cable certification tests. To increase the accuracy of length measurements you can adjust the NVP to a specified or actual value. Note NVP values can be different among cable types, lots, and manufacturers. Usually, these differences are not large enough to change the PASS/FAIL result of the length test. How to Set the NVP to a Specified Value Use this procedure to set the NVP to a specified value, such as the value specified by the manufacturer. The NVP value applies to the selected cable type. 346 Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits How to Change the NVP Note If you are on the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen, tap the NVP panel, then go to step 4 below. To enter a specified NVP value 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel, tap a copper test, then tap EDIT. 2 On the TEST SETUP screen, make sure that the Cable Type is correct. 3 Under the Cable Type, tap NVP. 4 On the NVP screen, use 5 Tap DONE, then tap SAVE. or to change the NVP value. How to Find a Cable's Actual NVP To find a cable's actual NVP, you can use the NVP screen to adjust the measured length to match a known length of cable. The NVP value applies to the selected cable type. To find a cable's NVP Note If you are on the NEW CUSTOM CABLE screen, tap the NVP panel, then go to step 4 below. 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel, tap a copper test, then tap EDIT. 2 On the TEST SETUP screen, make sure that the Cable Type is correct. 3 Under the Cable Type, tap NVP. 4 Attach a channel adapter to the tester. 5 Connect a known length of twisted pair cable to the tester. The cable must be a minimum of 30 m (100 ft) long. -continued- 347 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 6 Tap MEASURE. 7 On the NVP screen, use or to change the NVP value until the measured length is the length of the cable, then tap SAVE. How to Reset the NVP to the Default Value To reset the NVP to the default value defined by the selected cable type, select the cable type again on the TEST SETUP screen. How to Make a Custom Fiber Type If a fiber installation has a fiber type that is not in the list of types in the tester, you can make a custom fiber type for the job. A custom fiber type has these settings: Custom fiber name Category of fiber (OM categories for multimode, OS categories for singlemode) IOR (index of refraction) Backscatter value for fiber types for OTDR tests Use the values specified by the fiber manufacturer to make the custom fiber type. You can make up to 20 custom fiber types. The tester keeps custom fiber types with the other fiber types in the main Versiv unit (not in the module). The names of custom fiber types have an asterisk (*) at the start and end. To make a custom fiber type 348 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap an OLTS or OTDR fiber test, then tap EDIT. Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits How to Make a Custom Fiber Type Note You must select a test before you make a custom fiber type, but you can use the fiber type in any test that supports the category of the fiber. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Fiber Type, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap MANAGE. 4 On the MANAGE CUSTOM screen, tap the Create panel. 5 On the NEW CUSTOM FIBER screen, tap Enter New Fiber Name, use the keyboard to enter a name, then tap DONE. 6 Select a Category for the fiber. 7 For each wavelength, tap the panels for the available settings, then enter values for the settings. Table 16 gives descriptions of the settings. The default settings are typical values for the category of fiber you selected. 8 When you have entered all necessary values, tap SAVE on the NEW CUSTOM FIBER screen. The tester adds an asterisk (*) to the start and end of the custom fiber name. Table 16. Settings for Custom Fiber Types Setting Description Name Enter a name for the custom fiber type. Category The category specifies the level of performance of the fiber, such as the fiber’s attenuation and bandwidth. Select the category that is applicable to your custom fiber type. OS: Categories for singlemode fibers OM: Categories for multimode fibers -continued- 349 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 16. Settings for Custom Fiber Types (continued) Setting IOR (Index of refraction) Description The tester uses the index of refraction to calculate the optical length of the fiber. Optical length usually differs slightly from the length of the fiber jacket. This occurs because fibers are often curved inside their jackets and because there are small variations in the IOR of the fibers. Each fiber type includes a default value, which is the IOR specified by the manufacturer. When you increase the IOR value, the calculated length decreases. The tester accepts IOR values between 1.000 and 1.700. Enter the value specified by the fiber manufacturer. If you are not sure of the value, and the accuracy of length measurements is not very important, use the default value. See “About the Index of Refraction” on page 351. Backscatter (fibers for OTDR tests only) The backscatter coefficient is a measurement of the quantity of light that the fiber reflects back to the OTDR when the OTDR uses a 1 ns pulse. The tester uses this value to calculate the reflectance of events for OTDR tests and the overall ORL for the link. Each fiber type includes a default value, which is the backscatter coefficient specified by the manufacturer. Enter the value specified by the fiber manufacturer. If you are not sure of the value, use the default value 350 Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits About the Index of Refraction About the Index of Refraction The index of refraction is the ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to the speed of light in a fiber. The tester uses the index of refraction to calculate fiber length. When you increase the IOR value, the calculated length decreases. The default values the tester has for each fiber type are satisfactory for most applications. Small differences between the default IOR and the actual IOR of a fiber usually do not make enough difference in length to make a fiber fail a test. It is necessary to change the IOR at these times: The customer tells you to use a specific IOR value for the job. You test long fibers where a small difference between the default and actual values of IOR makes an unacceptably large error in length measurements. In some types of cable, some or all of the fibers are longer than the cable jacket. This can occur because the fiber has a spiral path inside the jacket. When you use and OTDR to locate faults on these cables, the fault is closer to the OTDR than the measured distance along the cable jacket. To make the measured distance to the fault the same as the distance along the cable jacket, adjust the IOR until the length of the fiber is the same as the length of the jacket. To change the IOR for a fiber, make a custom fiber type. 351 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook How to Make a Custom Fiber Test Limit Custom limits let you enter minimum and maximum values for tests you do with CertiFiber Pro OLTS and OptiFiber Pro OTDR modules. This lets you use customer requirements to pass or fail fiber links or components such as patch cords and connectors. For OLTS tests, you can also select a fixed loss budget or a loss budget that the tester calculates based on the length of the link. You can make up to 20 custom test limits for fiber cable. The tester keeps custom limits with the other limits in the main Versiv unit (not in the module). The names of custom limits have an asterisk (*) at the start and end. To make a custom fiber test limit 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap a fiber test, then tap EDIT. Note You must select a test before you make a custom test limit, but you can use the limit in any test that has the fiber types that the limit supports. 352 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Test Limit, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap MANAGE. 4 On the MANAGE CUSTOM screen, tap the Create panel. 5 On the NEW CUSTOM LIMIT screen, tap Enter New Limit Name, use the keyboard to enter a name, then tap DONE. 6 Enter a maximum value for the fiber length, if necessary. 7 Select or enter other settings as necessary for the limit. See Table17 for OLTS settings and Table18 for OTDR settings. 8 When you have entered all necessary limits, tap SAVE on the NEW CUSTOM LIMIT screen. The tester adds an asterisk (*) to the start and end of the custom fiber limit name. Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits How to Make a Custom Fiber Test Limit Table 17. Custom Test Limit Settings for Loss/Length Tests Setting Description Length Enter a maximum length for the link. Loss Budget Fixed: The tester compares the loss of the link to a fixed value to give a PASS or FAIL result for the loss test. You enter maximum values of Overall Loss for each applicable wavelength under Wavelength specific settings. Length Based: The tester uses values you enter for Connector, Splice, and Loss/km and the measured length of the link to calculate a limit for the loss test. Loss Type (for Length Based Loss Budget only) Connector: Select this if the link uses standard connectors, such as SC, LC, ST, or FC connectors. For the Connection Loss (dB), enter the maximum loss for one connection. MPO Module: Select this if the link uses MPO modules. Connection Loss (dB) changes to MPO Module Loss (dB). For MPO Module Loss (dB), enter the maximum loss for one MPO module. Splice Loss Enter a maximum value for the loss of one splice. (for Length Based Loss Budget only) Wavelength specific settings For a fixed loss budget, enter maximum values of Overall Loss for a link for each applicable wavelength. For a length-based loss budget, enter maximum values of Loss/km for the fiber type for each applicable wavelength. -continued- 353 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 18. Custom Test Limit Settings for OTDR Tests Setting Description* Length Enter a maximum length for the link. Connector Loss Enter a maximum value for connector loss. Splice Loss Enter a maximum value for the loss of one splice. Reflectance Reflectance is the return loss for one event. It is the ratio of the light reflected at one point on the fiber to the light that gets to that point from the source. Reflectance values are in units of negative dB. A smaller (more negative) reflectance value shows that less light is reflected back to the source. For example, a reflectance of -45 dB shows for a good multimode connection. A reflectance of -20 dB shows for a bad multimode connection that reflects more light back to the OTDR. Enter a maximum reflectance value for one event. Overall Loss Enter a maximum value for the loss of all components and fiber in the link. Enter a minimum loss value if receiver saturation is possibly a problem in the installation. Overall ORL Optical return loss is the total reflectance for all components in the link. This includes fiber segments, connectors, splices, and faults. ORL is the ratio of the light from the source to the light that the link reflects back to the source. ORL values are in units of positive dB. A larger ORL value shows that less light is reflected back to the source. For example, a link with an ORL of 45 dB reflects less light back to the source than a link with an ORL of 30 dB. Enter a minimum for the total reflectance for the link. 354 Chapter 15: Custom Media and Test Limits How to Make a Custom Fiber Test Limit Table 18. Custom Test Limit Settings for OTDR Tests (continued) Setting Description* Segment Attenuation Coefficient Enter a maximum value of attenuation per kilometer for a fiber segment in the link. N/A The tester will not compare the measurement to this value and will not give the measurement a PASS or FAIL result. Note In some situations, the tester cannot measure the segment attenuation coefficient for short segments (50 m to 500 m, depending on wavelength and fiber characteristics). * Usually, minimum values are not necessary, but they are available for special situations. Select a Custom Fiber Type or a Custom Limit 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the test, then tap EDIT. 3 Select a custom fiber type or limit: 4 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Fiber Type, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap a custom fiber type. On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Test Limit, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap a custom limit. On the TEST SETUP screen, tap SAVE. 355 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Edit an Existing Custom Fiber Type or Test Limit 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the test, then tap EDIT. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Fiber Type or Test Limit, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap MANAGE. 4 On the MANAGE CUSTOM screen, tap the Edit panel, then tap the fiber type or test limit you want to edit. Delete a Custom Fiber Type or Test Limit 356 1 On the home screen, tap the test setup panel. 2 On the CHANGE TEST screen, tap the test, then tap EDIT. 3 On the TEST SETUP screen, tap Test Limit, tap MORE, tap Custom, then tap MANAGE. 4 On the MANAGE CUSTOM screen, tap the Delete panel, tap the fiber type or test limit you want to delete, then tap DONE. Chapter 16: Maintenance Maintenance Warning To prevent possible fire, electric shock, personal injury, or damage to the tester: Do not open the case. You cannot repair or replace parts in the case. Use only replacement parts that are approved by Fluke Networks. If you replace parts that are not specified as replacement parts, the warranty will not apply to the product and you can make the product dangerous to use. Use only service centers that are approved by Fluke Networks. Caution If you replace electrical parts yourself, the tester will possibly not have the correct calibration and can give incorrect test results. If the calibration is not correct, cable manufacturers can remove their warranty from the cabling you install. 357 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Verify Operation The tester does a self test when you turn it on. If the tester shows an error or does not turn on, refer to “If the Tester Does Not Operate as Usual” on page 365. Clean the Tester To clean the touchscreen, turn off the tester, then use a soft, lintfree cloth that is moist with water or water and a mild detergent. To clean the case, use a soft cloth that is moist with water or water and a mild detergent. Warning Do not put the tester or the battery pack in water. Caution To prevent damage to the touchscreen or the case, do not use solvents or abrasive materials. When you clean the touchscreen or the case, do not let liquid get under the plastic around the touchscreen. To clean the connectors on an OTDR module, see the instructions in Chapter 6. See Information About the Tester To see information about your tester and attached modules and adapters On the home screen, tap the TOOLS icon, then tap Version Information. See Figure 78. To see information about a remote tester Use copper modules and adapters to connect the main and remote testers together (see Figure 4 on page 16), then tap REMOTE on the Version Information screen. 358 Chapter 16: Maintenance See Information About the Tester A B C D E Figure 78. VERSION INFORMATION Screen for the Main Unit GUP57.EPS The serial number and the software and hardware versions of the device. The versions of the databases for test limits and cable types. These databases are part of the software version installed in the main unit. If a remote tester is connected to the main tester, tap REMOTE to see information about the remote tester. If a link interface adapter is attached to the tester, you can tap ADAPTER to see this information about the adapter: Serial Number and the Hardware version of the adapter. 359 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Calibration Date is the date when the adapter was calibrated at a Fluke Networks factory or service center. Autotest Count is the number of Autotests done with the adapter. You can use this count to monitor the wear on the adapter’s jack or plug. Current Series is an Autotest count that you can reset. To reset the counter, tap Reset Series. Tap MODULE to see the Serial Number, Software version, and Calibration Date of the attached module. The Calibration Date is the date when the module was calibrated at a Fluke Networks factory or service center. Update the Software New software gives you access to new features and the latest test limits and cable types. Software updates are available on the Fluke Networks website. You can use a PC to install a software update, or connect an updated main unit to a remote or to another main unit to update those units. To use a PC to update the software Caution To prevent unexpected loss of power, connect the ac adapter to the tester when you update the software. Note The software update procedure does not delete the test records, project settings, or user preferences in the tester, but can possibly change the factory-installed cable types or test limits. 1 360 Install the latest version of LinkWare software on your PC. LinkWare is available on the Fluke Networks website. Chapter 16: Maintenance Update the Software 2 Download the Versiv update file from the Fluke Networks website, or contact Fluke Networks to get the update by other methods. Save the file to your hard drive. 3 Connect the Micro-AB USB port on the tester to a USB port on the PC. See Figure 79. 4 On the LinkWare menu, select Utilities > (name of the module) > Software Update, find and select the update file, then click Open. LinkWare saves the update file on the tester, then the tester installs the file. On a remote tester, the LEDs show the progress of the installation. 5 The tester reboots when the update is completed. To make sure the update was installed correctly, tap the TOOLS icon on the home screen, tap Version Information, then make sure the Versiv main unit and the module show the correct version. 6 If you have a Versiv remote, do steps 3 through 5 again for the remote tester. AC adapter Type A USB port Micro-AB USB port Figure 79. How to Connect the Tester to a PC GPU46.EPS 361 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook To use an updated main unit to update a remote or another main unit 1 Turn on both testers and connect the AC adapters to both testers. 2 Use the USB cable provided to connect the updated main unit to the remote or to another main. See Figure 80. 3 Follow the instructions shown on the display of the updated main unit. Note If a remote has newer software than the main unit, the main unit can install the older software in the remote so that you can use the two units together. The remote cannot install the newer software in the main unit. To update the software in a module To update the software in a module, attach it to a Versiv unit that has the latest software. The tester automatically installs the software in the module. 362 Chapter 16: Maintenance Update the Software AC adapter AC adapter Updated main unit Type A USB port Remote Micro-AB USB port AC adapter AC adapter Updated main unit Type A USB port Main unit Micro-AB USB port GPU116.EPS Figure 80. How to Connect Units Together to Update the Software 363 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Extend the Life of the Battery Do not frequently let the battery discharge completely. Do not keep the battery at temperatures below -20 oC (-4 oF) or above +50 oC (+122 oF) for periods longer than one week. Before you put a battery into storage, charge it to approximately 50 % of full charge. Store the Tester Before you store a tester or an extra battery for a long period, charge the battery to approximately 50 % of full charge. The discharge rate of the battery is 5 % to 10 % each month. Check the battery every 4 months and charge it if necessary. Keep a battery attached to the tester during storage. If you remove the battery for more than approximately 24 hours, the tester will not keep the correct time and date. See “Environmental and Regulatory Specifications” on page 369 for storage temperatures. Remove the Battery Figure 81 shows how to remove the battery. Notes If you remove the battery and do not connect the ac adapter, the clock keeps the current date and time for a minimum of 24 hours. The screw does not come out of the battery door. 364 Chapter 16: Maintenance Calibration B C A OFF Model VERSIV-BATTERY Figure 81. How to Remove the Battery GPU21.EPS Calibration To make sure that the modules operate within the published specifications for accuracy, have them calibrated at a Fluke Networks authorized service center every 12 months. To get information on factory calibration, contact an authorized Fluke Networks Service Center. To see when the tester last received a factory calibration, tap the TOOLS icon on the home screen, then tap Version Information. If the Tester Does Not Operate as Usual If the tester does not operate as usual or if it shows an unusual message, see Table 19 for possible explanations and solutions to some conditions that can occur. If the condition continues, contact Fluke Networks for assistance, or search the Fluke Networks Knowledge Base for a solution. If you contact Fluke Networks, have available the serial number, software and hardware versions, and calibration date for the tester, if possible. To see this information, tap the TOOLS icon on the home screen, then tap Version Information. 365 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook You can also use LinkWare software to upload the system log from the tester. This file contains information that can possibly help Fluke Networks find a solution to an unusual problem. To see the serial numbers of the mainframe and module if the tester is not operating correctly, remove the module and look at the stickers under and on the module. Table 19. Possible Solutions for Unusual Behavior The touchscreen or the keys do not respond. Press and hold until the tester turns off. Then turn on the tester. If the problem continues, install the latest version of software in the tester. The tester will not turn on even though the battery is charged. The fuse in the battery is possibly open. Connect the AC adapter. The tester can operate on AC power if the battery does not operate. The OTDR Port Connection Quality gauge is not in the “Good” range. The fiber endface in the OTDR connector is possibly dirty or damaged. Clean the connector and inspect the endface with a video probe. If an endface is damaged, contact Fluke Networks for service information. Remove the fiber adapter from the module and inspect the adapter for damage. Make sure that the white plastic ring inside the center tube shows no damage. Test results appear to be incorrect. The tester possibly has incorrect settings. Make sure you selected the correct fiber type and test limit. If you did a Manual OTDR test, do an Auto OTDR test to see if you get the correct results. The tester is connected to the link with the wrong type of fiber. Make sure you use the correct type of launch/tail cords. See Chapter 12 “How to Diagnose Problems in Fiber Links” for information on how incorrect settings and connections can possibly affect your test results. 366 Chapter 16: Maintenance Clean the DI-1000 Video Probe Table 19. Possible Solutions for Unusual Behavior (continued) The message “Selected test limit or fiber type is not valid for this test” shows. The test limit requires two wavelengths, but you selected only one. Select the both wavelengths on the TEST SETUP screen. The installed module does not support the selected fiber type or test limit. For example, the test limit has a singlemode fiber type, but a multimode module is installed. Select a different fiber type or test limit or install a different module. Clean the DI-1000 Video Probe To clean the case, use a soft cloth that is moist with a mild detergent. Caution To prevent damage to the case, do not use solvents or abrasive materials. To clean the lens, remove the adapter tip, then wipe the lens with an optical-grade cloth that is moist with an optical-grade cleaning solution. Options and Accessories For a complete list of options and accessories go to the Fluke Networks website at www.flukenetworks.com. To order options and accessories, contact an authorized Fluke Networks distributor. 367 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 368 Chapter 17: Specifications Note Specifications apply at 23 oC (73 oF), unless otherwise noted. Environmental and Regulatory Specifications Operating temperature1, 2 With DSX CableAnalyzer modules: 32 °F to 113 °F (0 oC to 45 oC) With CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro modules: 0 °F to 113 °F (-18 oC to 45 oC) Storage temperature3 -22 °F to +140 °F (-30 oC to +60 oC) Operating relative humidity 0 % to 90 %, 32 °F to 95 °F (0 oC to 35 oC) (% RH without condensation) 0 % to 70 %, 95 °F to 113 °F (35 oC to 45 oC) Vibration Random, 2 g, 5 Hz-500 Hz Shock 1 m drop test with and without module and adapter Safety CSA 22.2 No. 61010 IEC 61010-1 2nd Edition + Amendments 1, 2 Operating altitude 13,123 ft (4,000 m) 10,500 ft (3,200 m) with ac adapter Storage altitude 39,370 ft (12,000 m) Pollution degree 2 EMC EN 61326-1 1. Using battery power. With ac power: 0 oC to 45 oC. 2. With the OptiFiber Pro OTDR module: Real Time Trace function used for no more than 5 minutes in a 15-minute period. Maximum ambient temperature is 35 oC for continuous use of the Real Time Trace function. 3. Do not keep the battery at temperatures below -20 oC (-4 oF) or above +50 oC (+122 oF) for periods longer than one week. If you do, the battery capacity can decrease. 369 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer Module Specifications Tests and Frequencies Supported DSX-5000 Modules TIA Cat 3, 4, 5, 5e, 6, 6A, 7 certification per TIA 568-C.2 ISO/IEC Class C and D, E, EA, F, FA certification per ISO/IEC 11801:2002 and amendments Maximum frequency: 1200 MHz Times for a Full, 2-Way Autotest Category Autotest Time1,2,3 Cat 5e or 6/Class D or E < 9 seconds Cat 6A/Class EA < 10 seconds ISO 11801 PL Class E (includes TCL) < 15 seconds4 Cat 7/Class F or FA < 15 seconds Class FA, All tests < 30 seconds5 1. On unshielded cable. Autotests on shielded cable take approximately 0.6 seconds longer. 2. The first Autotest after power-on takes approximately 1.5 seconds longer. If the Autotest includes common-mode measurements, add 0.8 seconds more. 3. AC wire map function adds approximately 3 seconds to Autotest times. 4. Also applicable to any Cat 6/Class E Autotest with common-mode measurements. 5. Also applicable to any Class F/FA Autotest with common-mode measurements. 370 Chapter 17: Specifications DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer Module Specifications Standard Link Interface Adapters DSX-PLA004 Class FA Permanent Link Adapters Plug type and life: shielded RJ45, 8-pin modular, >5000 insertions, on a 5 ft (1.5 m) cable Tests supported: shielded and unshielded cable, TIA Cat 3, 4, 5, 5e, 6, and 6A, and ISO/IEC Class C, D, E, EA permanent links CHA004 Class FA Channel Adapters Jack type and life: shielded RJ45, 8-pin modular, >5000 insertions Tests supported: shielded and unshielded cable, TIA Cat 3, 4, 5, 5e, 6, and 6A and ISO/IEC Class C, D, E, and EA channels Twisted Pair LAN Cable Types Tested Unscreened, unshielded (U/UTP) Unscreened, foil shielded (U/FTP) Foil screened, unshielded (F/UTP) Screened (braided), foil shielded (S/FTP) Screened (braided) and foil screened, unshielded (SF/UTP) Foil screened and shielded (SFTP) TIA Category 3, 4, 5, 5e, 6, 6A: 100 ISO/IEC Class C, D, E, EA, F, and FA: 100 and 120 371 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Summary of Performance Specifications Note All specifications for tests on twisted pair cabling apply to 100 cable. Contact Fluke Networks for information on measurement performance for cable with a different impedance. For Category 6A/Class EA test modes or below, the DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer modules are compliant with Level IIIe requirements of TIA 1152 and Level IV of IEC 61935-1. For Class FA test modes, the DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer modules are compliant with Level V requirements as in the draft 4th edition of IEC 61935-1. Length Note Length specifications do not include the uncertainty of the cable’s NVP value. Twisted Pair Cabling Parameter Without Remote With Remote Range 800 m (2600 ft) 150 m (490 ft) Resolution 0.1 m or 1 ft 0.1 m or 1 ft Accuracy (0.3 m + 2 %); 0 m to 150 m (0.3 m + 2 %) (0.3 m + 4 %); 150 m to 800 m 372 Chapter 17: Specifications Summary of Performance Specifications Propagation Delay Twisted pair cabling Parameter Without Remote With Remote Range 4000 ns 750 ns Resolution 1 ns 1 ns Accuracy (2 ns + 2 %); 0 ns to 750 ns (2 ns + 2 %) (2 ns + 4 %); 750 ns to 4000 ns Delay Skew Parameter Twisted Pair Cabling Range 0 ns to 100 ns Resolution 1 ns Accuracy 10 ns DC Loop Resistance Parameter Twisted pair cabling Range 0 to 540 Resolution 0.1 Accuracy (1 + 1 %) Overload Recovery Time Less than 10 minutes to rated accuracy following an overvoltage. Referencing is required after repeated or prolonged overvoltage. 373 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Input Protection Protected against continuous telco voltages and 100 mA overcurrent. Occasional ISDN over-voltages will not cause damage. Measurement Accuracy The measurement accuracy of Versiv testers with DSXCableAnalyzer modules meets or exceeds accuracy Level IV. Worst case accuracy performance parameters are used for asterisk (*) results reporting. These are based on computation of the overall measurement accuracy based on the worst case of each parameter at each frequency data point. Observed differences between laboratory equipment and DSX CableAnalyzer modules using calibration verification artifacts were used as a confirmation. Table 20 shows the accuracy performance parameters. 374 Chapter 17: Specifications Summary of Performance Specifications Table 20. Level V Accuracy Performance Parameters per IEC Guidelines Parameter Baseline Field Tester Field Tester with Level V Permanent Link Adapter Field Tester with Level V Channel Adapter Dynamic range 3 dB over test limit PPNEXT and FEXT 65 dB PS NEXT and FEXT 62 dB Amplitude resolution 0.1 dB Frequency range and resolution 1 MHz to 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz 31.25 MHz to 100 MHz: 250 kHz 100 MHz to 250 MHz: 500 kHz 250 MHz to 600 MHz: 1 MHz 600 – 1,000 MHz: 2 MHz Dynamic Accuracy NEXT ± 0.75 dB Dynamic Accuracy ACR-F ± 1.0 dB (FEXT dynamic accuracy is tested to ± 0.75 dB) Source/load return loss 1 MHz to 300 MHz: 20 – 12.5 log(f/100), 20 dB maximum 1- 300 MHz: 18 – 12.5 log(f/100), 20 dB maximum 300 MHz to 600 MHz: 14 dB 600-1,000 MHz: 19-9 log(f/100) 300 MHz to 600 MHz: 12 dB 600-1,000 MHz: 21-9 log(f/100) Random Noise Floor 95 dB 90 dB -continued- 375 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Table 20. Level V Accuracy Performance Parameters per IEC Guidelines (continued) Parameter Residual NEXT Baseline Field Tester 90 – 20 log(f/100) (measured to 85 dB maximum) Field Tester with Level V Permanent Link Adapter Field Tester with Level V Channel Adapter 85 - 20 log(f/100) 1-600 MHz: (measured to 82.3 - 20 log(f/100) 85 dB maximum) 600-1,000 MHz: 97.9 - 40 log(f/100) (measured to 85 dB maximum) Residual FEXT 80 - 20 log(f/100) (measured to 85 dB maximum) 75 - 20 log(f/100) 60 - 15 log(f/100) (measured to (measured to 85 dB maximum) 85 dB maximum) Output Signal Balance 1-600 MHz: 40 - 20 log(f/100) 1 - 600 MHz: 37 - 20 log(f/100) Common Mode Rejection 40 - 20 log(f/100) (measured to 60 dB maximum) Tracking 0.5 dB (applicable when IL > 3 dB) 376 600-1,000 MHz: 24.4 dB (measured to 60 dB maximum) 600 - 1,000 MHz: 21.4 dB (measured to 60 dB maximum) 37 - 20 log(f/100) (measured to 60 dB maximum) Chapter 17: Specifications Summary of Performance Specifications Table 20. Level V Accuracy Performance Parameters per IEC Guidelines (continued) Parameter Directivity Baseline Field Tester Field Tester with Level V Permanent Link Adapter Field Tester with Level V Channel Adapter 1 MHz to 300 MHz: 27 - 7log(f/100), 30 dB maximum 1 MHz to 300 MHz: 25 - 7 log(f/100), 30 dB maximum 300 MHz to 600 MHz: 23.7 dB 600 MHz to 1,000 MHz: 30.7 - 9 log(f/100) 600 MHz to 1,000 MHz: 27.7 - 9 log(f/100) (applicable when IL > 3 dB) 300 MHz to 600 MHz: 21.7 dB (applicable when IL > 3 dB) Source Match 20 dB (applicable when IL > 3dB) Return loss of Termination 1 MHz to 250 MHz: 20 - 15log(f/100), 25 dB maximum 250 MHz to 600 MHz: 14 dB 600 MHz to 1,000 MHz: 21 - 9 log(f/100) 1 MHz to 250 MHz: 18 - 15 log(f/100), 25 dB maximum 250 MHz to 600 MHz: 12 dB 600 MHz to 1,000 MHz: 19 - 9 log(f/100) (applicable when IL > 3 dB) (applicable when IL > 3 dB) 377 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook HDTDX Analyzer Specifications for Cables <100 m (328 ft) The specifications below are typical for cables less than 100 m (328 ft). Parameter Twisted Pair Cable Distance accuracy (1 ft (0.3 m) + 2 % distance) Distance resolution 1 ft or 0.1 m HDTDR Analyzer Specifications for Cables <100 m (328 ft) The specifications below are for HDTDR tests on cables less than 100 m (328 ft) long. Parameter Twisted Pair Cable Distance accuracy (1 ft (0.3 m) + 2 % distance) Distance resolution 1 ft or 0.1 m Characteristic Impedance The tester gives an estimate of the cable's impedance at 4 m from the start of the link. The accuracy of the measurement is relative to a 100 terminating resistance. Parameter Twisted Pair Cable Range 70 - 180 Accuracy ± (5 + 5 % of 100 – Measured) Resolution 1 378 Chapter 17: Specifications CertiFiber Pro OLTS Module Specifications CertiFiber Pro OLTS Module Specifications CertiFiber Pro Power Meter Specifications Input connector Interchangeable connector adapter (LC standard) Detector type InGaAs Wavelengths 850 nm, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm, 1625 nm Power measurement range 850 nm: +10 dBm to -65 dBm All other wavelengths: +10 dBm to -70 dBm Display resolution dB, dBm: 0.01 Linear (nW, µW, mW): 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9 depending upon value Display update rate 1 reading per second Power measurement uncertainty (accuracy) 5 % 32 pW1,2 Measurement linearity < 0.1 dB3 Re-calibration period 1 year 1. 100 pW at 850 nm 2. Under the following conditions: Power level 100 µW (-10 dBm), continuous wave (CW) for absolute power at 850 nm and 1310 nm. Divergent beam, NA = 0.20 for 50/125 µm and NA = 0.14 for 9/125 µm. Ambient temperature 23° ± 1 °C. SC/UPC connector with ceramic ferrule. After a 5 minute warm-up. Traceable to NIST. 3. -3 dBm to -55 dBm at 850 nm and 1310 nm. Ambient temperature 23 °C ± 1 °C. After a 5 minute warm-up. 379 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook CertiFiber Pro OLTS Loss/Length Specifications Specification CertiFiber Pro Multimode Modules CertiFiber Pro Singlemode Modules Testing speeds (excluding referencing times) Smart Remote mode (2 wavelengths, one direction): 3 s Far End Source mode1 (2 wavelengths, one direction): 2 s Loopback mode (2 wavelengths, one direction): 2 s Input/output connectors Interchangeable connector adapter (LC standard on input, SC standard on output) Launch Condition Encircled flux compliant to TIA 455-526-14-B, ISO/IEC 14763-3, and IEC 61280-4-12,3 Fiber types tested 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm multimode fiber Singlemode fiber Source type and wavelengths Multimode LED source 850 nm 30 nm 1300 nm 20 nm Fabry-Perot laser diode 1310 nm 20 nm 1550 nm 30 nm Maximum length measurement 12 km 130 km Length measurement accuracy 1.5 m plus 1 % of length Output power (nominal) -24 dBm with EF-TRC -4 dBm Output power stability4 0.05 dB over 8 hours 0.03 dB over 15 minutes 0.1 dB over 8 hours 0.08 dB over 15 minutes 1. In Auto CertiFiber Pro mode. In Auto SimpliFiber Pro mode: < 4 seconds (2 wavelengths). With the source in continuous-wave mode: < 1 second (1 wavelength). 2. At the output of the EF-TRC. 3. Variations between EF measurement equipment may occur but EF compliance can be expected with a 95 % confidence factor. 4. At constant temperature, relative to power level after 15 minute warm up. 380 Chapter 17: Specifications CertiFiber Pro OLTS Module Specifications CertiFiber Pro OLTS Loss/Length Specifications (cont.) CertiFiber Pro Multimode Modules Specification CertiFiber Pro Singlemode Modules Wavelengths 850 nm, 1300 nm, 1310 nm, 1550 nm Power measurement range 850 nm: +10 dBm to -65 dBm All other wavelengths: +10 dBm to -70 dBm Display Resolution dB, dBm: 0.01 Linear (nW, µW, mW): 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9 depending upon value Power measurement uncertainty (accuracy) 5 % 32 pW1,2 Measurement linearity < 0.1 dB3 Dynamic Range for mainremote communication and nominal length measurement 12 dB 26 dB 1. 100 pW at 850 nm 2. Under the following conditions: Power level 100 µW (-10 dBm), continuous wave (CW) for absolute power at 850 nm and 1310 nm. Divergent beam, NA = 0.20 for 50/125 µm and NA = 0.14 for 9/125 µm. Ambient temperature 23° ± 1 °C. SC/UPC connector with ceramic ferrule. After a 5 minute warm-up. Traceable to NIST. 3. -3 dBm to -55 dBm at 850 nm and 1310 nm. Ambient temperature 23 °C ± 1 °C. After a 5 minute warm-up. 381 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications Multimode Singlemode Cleanable and Interchangeable Cleanable and Interchangeable UPC polish UPC polish Wavelengths 850 nm 10 nm 1300 nm +35 / -15 nm 1310 nm 25 nm 1550 nm 30 nm Compatible Fiber Types 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm multimode fiber Singlemode fiber Event Dead Zone1 850 nm: 0.5 m typical 1310 nm: 0.6 m typical 1300 nm: 0.7 m typical 1550 nm: 0.6 m typical Attenuation Dead Zone2 850 nm: 2.2 m typical 1300 nm: 4.5 m typical OTDR Port 1310 nm: 3.6 m typical 1550 nm: 3.7 m typical 1. Measured at 1.5 dB below non-saturating reflection peak with the shortest pulse width. Reflection peak < -40 dB for multimode and < -50 dB for singlemode. 2. Measured at 0.5 dB deviation from backscatter with the shortest pulse width. Reflection peak < -40 dB for multimode and < -50 dB for singlemode. 382 Chapter 17: Specifications OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications (cont.) Multimode 3, 5, 6 Singlemode 850 nm: 28 dB typical 1300 nm: 30 dB typical 1310 nm: 32 dB typical 1550 nm: 30 dB typical Maximum Distance Range Setting 40 km 130 km Distance Measurement Range4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10 850 nm: 9 km 1300 nm: 35 km 1310 nm: 80 km 1550 nm: 130 km Distance Measurement Accuracy11 1 (0.00005 x distance) (0.5 x resolution) meters typical 1 (0.00005 x distance) (0.5 x resolution) meters typical Dynamic Range 3. For typical backscatter coefficient for OM1 fiber: 850: -65 dB, 1300: -72 dB 4. Typical backscatter and attenuation coefficients for OM2-OM4 fiber: 850 nm: -68 dB; 2.3 dB/km: 1300 nm: -76 dB; 0.6 dB/km 5. Typical backscatter and attenuation coefficients for OS1-OS2 fiber: 1310 nm: -79 dB; 0.32 dB/km; 1550 nm: -82 dB; 0.19 dB/km 6. SNR=1 method, 3 minute averaging, widest pulse width 7. 850 nm: 9 km typical to find the end or 7 km typical to find a 0.1 dB event (with a maximum of 18 dB attenuation prior to the event) 8. 1300 nm: 35 km typical to find the end or 30 km typical to find a 0.1 dB event (with a maximum of 18 dB attenuation prior to the event) 9. 1310 nm: 80 km typical to find the end or 60 km typical to find a 0.1 dB event (with a maximum of 20 dB attenuation prior to the event). 10. 1550 nm: 130 km typical to find the end or 90 km typical to find a 0.1 dB event (with a maximum of 18 dB attenuation prior to the event). 11. Does not include index of refraction error and does not include automatic event location error. -continued- 383 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications (cont.) Multimode Singlemode Linearity12, 13 0.03 dB/dB typical maximum 0.03 dB/dB typical maximum Reflectance Range4, 5 850 nm: -14 dB to -57 dB typical 1300 nm: -14 dB to -62 dB typical 1310 nm: -14 dB to -65 dB typical 1550 nm: -14 dB to -65 dB typical Reflection Accuracy13 4 dB typical maximum 2 dB typical maximum Sample Resolution 3 cm to 400 cm 3 cm to 400 cm Pulse Widths (nominal) 850 nm: 3, 5, 20, 40, 200 ns 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000 ns 1300 nm: 3, 5, 20, 40, 200, 3000, 10000, 20000 ns 1000 ns Loss Threshold Setting 0.01 dB to 1.5 dB Adjustable in 0.01 dB increments 0.01 dB to 1.5 dB Adjustable in 0.01 dB increments Units of Measure m, ft m, ft 12. dB variation per 1 dB step. 13. Applies along the trace backscatter within the distance range in which the OTDR can find a 0.1 dB event. 384 Chapter 17: Specifications OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications (cont.) Multimode Singlemode Test time per wavelength Auto 5 seconds (typical) 10 seconds (typical) Quick Test 2 seconds (typical) 5 seconds (typical) Best Resolution 2 to 180 seconds 5 to 180 seconds FaultMap 2 seconds typical 180 seconds maximum 10 seconds typical 180 seconds maximum DataCenter OTDR 1 second typical at 850 nm 20 seconds typical 7 seconds maximum 40 seconds maximum Manual 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 90, 120, 180 seconds 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 90, 120, 180 seconds Laser classification Class I CDRH Complies to EN 60825-2 Class I CDRH Complies to EN 60825-2 Real Time Trace refresh rate 2 updates per second typical 2 updates per second typical 385 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 7 Dead Zone (meters) 6 5 4 0 nm 130 ne d Zo a e D ion uat n e Att Zone Dead n o i t enua m Att 850 n 3 2 850 nm/1300 nm Event Dead Zone 1 0 -55 -50 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 Connector Reflectance (dB) Figure 82. Typical Dead Zone Performance of Multimode OptiFiber Pro Modules 386 GPU47.EPS Chapter 17: Specifications OptiFiber Pro OTDR Module Specifications 14 10 Dead Zone (meters) 12 8 6 enuatio 0 nm Att 1310/155 4 2 one n Dead Z 1310/1550 nm Event Dead Zone 0 -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 Connector Reflectance (dB) -35.0 -30.0 Figure 83. Typical Dead Zone Performance of Singlemode OptiFiber Pro Modules GPU55.EPS 387 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Visual Fault Locator On/off control Mechanical switch and a button on the touchscreen Output power (into SM fiber with SC/UPC connector) 316 µw (-5 dBm) peak power 1.0 mW (< 0 dBm) Operating wavelength 650 nm nominal Spectral width (RMS) 3 nm Output modes Continuous wave and pulse mode (2 Hz to 3 Hz) Connector adapter 2.5 mm universal Laser safety Class II CDRH over operating temperature range Complies to EN 60825-2 DI-1000 Video Probe Magnification 200X with OptiFiber Pro display Light source Blue LED Connection to OptiFiber Pro tester USB type A plug Power source Power supplied by the main Versiv unit Field-of-view (FOV) Horizontal: 425 µm Vertical: 320 µm Minimum detectable particle size <0.5 µm Dimensions Approximately 6.75 in long x 1.5 in diameter (1175 mm x 35 mm) without adapter tip Weight 7 oz. (198 g) Temperature range Operating: 32 °F to 122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) Storage: -4 °F to +158 °F (-20 °C to +70 °C) Certifications 388 (when used with the main Versiv unit) Chapter 17: Specifications Power Power Battery type Lithium ion battery pack, 7.2 V Battery life 8 hr Auto OTDR operation, dual wavelength, no video probe connected, 150 m of fiber Charge time Tester off: 4 hours to charge from 10 % capacity to 90 % capacity. Tester on: 6 hours to charge from 10 % capacity to 90 % capacity with the tester on. Traceable Calibration Period To make sure that the modules operate within the published specifications for accuracy, have them calibrated at a Fluke Networks authorized service center every 12 months. Certifications and Compliance Conformite Europeene. Conforms to the requirements of the European Union and the European Free Trade Association (EFTA). Listed by the Canadian Standards Association. Conforms to relevant Australian standards. Conforms to relevant Russian standards. KCC-REM-FKN-012001001: EMC approval for Korea Class A Equipment (Industrial Broadcasting & Communication Equipment) This product meets requirements for industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave equipment and the seller or user should take notice of it. This equipment is intended for use in business environments and is not to be used in homes. A 급 기기 ( 업무용 방송통신기자재 ) 이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점 을 주의하시기 바라며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로합니다 . 389 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Internal Memory for Test Results Typical capacity for the internal memory depends on the type of tests you save: Twisted pair tests: Approximately 12,700 Cat 6A Autotest results, with plot data included. Loss/length fiber tests: Approximately 30,000 fiber test results OTDR tests: Approximately 2000 OTDR tests on fiber links with an average length of 2 km, and up to 5000 tests for lengths less than 2 km. The capacity available for test results also depends on the space used by the software and custom test limits in the tester. The number of test records you can save decreases if you save more tests in each record, or if you save tests that use more memory. For example, twisted pair results saved with plot data use more memory than results without plot data. USB Flash Drive You can upload test results to a USB flash drive to make more internal memory available. Note The tester reads only USB drives that use the FAT format. Serial Interfaces USB host interface with a type A USB port USB interface with a Micro-AB USB port RJ45 Connector For functions available in future software releases. 390 Chapter 17: Specifications Headset Jack Headset Jack 3.5 mm, 4-conductor jack Display 5.7 in LCD display with a projected capacitance touchscreen. Weights Main Versiv unit 2 lb 4.5 oz (1.03 kg) Remote Versiv units 1 lb 11.5 oz (780 g) DSX-5000 CableAnalyzer module 11.2 oz (318 g) CertiFiber Pro Quad OLTS module 1 lb 0.7 oz (473 g) OptiFiber Pro Quad OTDR module 1 lb 0.3 oz (462 g) Dimensions Main or remote Versiv unit with DSX-5000 module and battery installed 10.2 in x 5.2 in x 2.5 in Main or remote Versiv unit with CertiFiber Pro or OptiFiber Pro module installed 11.1 in x 5.2 in x 2.5 in (26.0 cm x 13.2 cm x 6.4 cm) (28.2 cm x 13.2 cm x 6.4 cm) 391 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Regulatory Information This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15, Subpart J of the FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of the equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. 392 Appendix A: OTDR Tests on Long Fiber Links The OptiFiber Pro OTDR can do tests on multimode links up to 35 km and on singlemode links up to 130 km at 1550 nm. This appendix gives information on how to set up the tester and select launch cords to do OTDR tests on links longer than approximately 27 km. Make a Custom Fiber Type, If Necessary If the list of fiber types in the tester does not include the fiber type used in the link, make a custom fiber type. For instructions on how to make a custom fiber type, see Chapter 15. Get these values from the manufacturer of the fiber: Index of refraction: This setting affects the length measurement. It is important to have the correct value for the fiber when you do tests on long fibers. Backscatter coefficient: This setting affects reflectance and optical return loss measurements. Use a Launch Cord of the Correct Type Select a launch cord that has properties that are similar to the link. If the launch cord is not similar, the OTDR will show loss measurements that are higher or lower that the actual loss of the link. This can cause a “gainer” in the test results from one direction. If the launch cord is similar to the fiber in the link, but you still see a difference in the backscatter from the fibers, you can use LinkWare software to do bi-directional averaging. 393 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Use a Launch Cord of the Correct Length To do an OTDR test on a long fiber, the tester uses wider pulse widths to increase dynamic range. Wider pulse widths make wider dead zones, which can hide the first connector and the fiber at the near end of the link. To make sure you see measurements for the near end of the link, use a launch cord that is longer than the dead zone. Table A-1 shows examples of minimum lengths of launch cords for typical links. Table A-1. Minimum Length of a Launch Cord Maximum Length of Link (km) Typical Pulse Width (ns) Minimum Launch Cord Length (meters)* 1310 nm 1550 nm only 0 to 35 0 to 50 1000 130 35 to 45 50 to 65 3000 400 45 to 50 65 to 75 10000 1000 50 75 20000 2400 * For fiber with typical attenuation ( 0.35 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.2 dB/km at 1550 nm) and event loss less than 0.8 dB. Use a Launch Cord that Has the Correct Connectors One end of the launch cord must have the same type of connector as the OTDR. The other end must have the same type of connector and polish as the link. Do not use hybrid patch cords to connect launch cords to the OTDR or to the link. 394 Use the Correct Test Limit Use the Correct Test Limit Make sure that the limit you select does not have a length limit that is too short for the link. Note For more information and updates on how to do tests on long links, see the Fluke Networks Knowledge Base. 395 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 396 Appendix B: Reference Method Names Industry standards use different names for the three reference methods. Tables B-2 and B-3 show the names used in this manual and by four common standards. Table B-2. Reference Method Names fore TIA/EIA Standards Link End Connections Included in Loss Results Method Name in This Manual TIA/EIA-526-14A (multimode) TIA/EIA-526-7 (singlemode) 2 connections 1 Jumper Method B Method A.1 1 connection 2 Jumper Method A Method A.2 None 3 Jumper Method C Method A.3 Table B-3. Reference Method Names for IEC Standards Link End Connections Included in Loss Results Method Name in This Manual IEC 61280-4-1 (multimode) IEC 61280-4-2 (singlemode) 2 connections 1 Jumper Method 2 Method A1 1 connection 2 Jumper Method 1 Method A2 None 3 Jumper Method 3 Method A3 397 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 398 Appendix C: Reference Methods for Fiber Cabling Introduction Notes The following discussion uses the 1, 2, and 3 jumper terminology for the names of the three common test methods. See Appendix B for a cross-reference of the method names in various standards. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A and 526-7 specify Method B for measuring loss on multimode premises fiber and Method A.1 for singlemode premises fiber, respectively. Both are 1 jumper reference methods. The number of fiber connections represented in loss test results depends on how many test reference cords you use to set the reference. This appendix describes the three common reference methods: 1, 2, and 3 jumper. Use the Reference Method setting on the tester’s TEST SETUP screen to select the method you will use. This setting does not change the loss measurements, but it can change the PASS/FAIL result for test limits that use a calculated loss limit. For all test limits, the tester saves this setting to show the reference method you used. 399 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 1 Jumper Reference For a 1 jumper reference, you use 1 test reference cord in each fiber path when you set the reference, as shown in Figure C-1. Loss results for the 1 jumper reference method include both connections plus the fiber in the link. This method is suitable for testing premises fiber, where patch cords are typically used at both ends of the link and connector loss is a significant portion of the total loss. Appendix B shows the names of the standards that define the 1 jumper method. Industry standards specify the 1 jumper reference method for testing multimode and singlemode premises fiber, where connector loss is a significant portion of the total loss. Note Other methods are available for getting jumper results when you do not have the correct connector adapters for the tester. See “Modified 1 Jumper Reference” on page 406. For additional methods, see the Fluke Networks Knowledge Base. 400 1 Jumper Reference Additional test reference cord Use 2 test reference cords Additional test reference cord Reference Fiber Link Test Figure C-1. 1 Jumper Reference and Test Connections (singlemode shown) GPU154.EPS 401 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 2 Jumper Reference For a 2 jumper reference, you use 2 test reference cords in each fiber path when you set the reference, as shown in Figure C-2. The test connections add one connection, plus the fiber in the link, to each path. Loss results for the 2 jumper reference method therefore include only one connection plus the fiber in the link. This method is suitable for links where the fiber's loss is a significant portion of the total loss, such as when the link is long or a patch cord is used at only one end. Appendix B shows the names of the standards that define the 2 jumper reference method. Because the results omit one connection, industry standards do not recommend the 2 jumper reference method for testing premises fiber, where patch cords are typically used at both ends of a link and connector loss is a significant portion of total loss. Note If you use a 2 Jumper reference, the Wizard for the reference procedure does not show steps for the TRC verification. To save test results for the TRCs, do the tests manually. 402 2 Jumper Reference Use 4 test reference cords Reference Fiber Link Test GPU155.EPS Figure C-2. 2 Jumper Reference and Test Connections (singlemode shown) 403 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 3 Jumper Reference For a 3 jumper reference, you use 3 test reference cords in each fiber path when you set the reference, as shown in Figure C-3. The test connections add only the fiber in link to each path. Loss results for 3 jumper reference method therefore include only the fiber in the link. This method is suitable for testing links where the fiber's loss is the majority of the total loss, such as when the link is very long or patch cords are not used at either end. Appendix B shows the names of the standards that define the 3 jumper reference method. Because the results omit both connections in the link, industry standards do not recommend the 3 jumper reference method for testing premises fiber, where patch cords are typically used at both ends of the link and connector loss is a large portion of the total loss. Note When you use the CertiFiber Pro Wizard to verify your test reference cords for the 3 jumper reference method, you must set the reference twice. The first time is for the test on the TRCs, and the second time is for tests on the fiber links. 404 3 Jumper Reference Use 6 test reference cords Reference Fiber Link Test GPU156.EPS Figure C-3. 3 Jumper Reference and Test Connections (singlemode shown) 405 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook Modified 1 Jumper Reference This section shows modified reference and test connections that give 1 jumper results. Use these connections if you need 1 jumper results, but do not have the correct connector adapters to connect the CertiFiber Pro modules’ output ports to the link. This method lets you keep the test reference cords connected to the module’s output ports when you connect the modules to the link. Figure C-4 shows reference and test connections for a fiber with MT-RJ connectors. On the tester select 1 Jumper as the Reference Method when using modified 1 Jumper connections. 406 Modified 1 Jumper Reference Caution Do not disconnect the outputs ( and ) after you set the reference. Mandrel* Short MT-RJ (no pins) to MT-RJ (pinned) test reference cord (0.3 m or less. Mandrel* Reference Fiber Link Test *Use mandrels only with multimode modules. gpu139.eps Figure C-4. Modified 1 Jumper Reference and Test Connections for Smart Remote Mode 407 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 408 Index Symbols –6– * in results, 79 % Tested, 164 copper tests, 66 include a fiber test in this value, 336 OTDR tests, 222 < > (in OTDR results), 242, 258, 259 62 dB rule, 118 65 dB rule, 118 67 dB rule, 119 –1– –A– 1 jumper reference modified, 406 standard, 178, 400 1, 2, 3 jumper setting, 173 10 % rule, 85, 132 12 dB rule, 118 –2– 2 jumper reference, 402 –3– 3 dB rule, 118 3 jumper reference, 404 –4– 4 dB rule, 118 –7– 70 dB rule, 119 ac adapter, 13 AC wire map setting, 73 test, 125 accessories, 367 ACR. See ACR-N. ACR-F causes of failures, 134 results, 105 ACR-N causes of failures, 134 results, 102 alien crosstalk, 123 APC connectors event table, 250 FaultMap, 274 in ORL measurements, 256 launch compensation, 233, 234 launch/tail cords, 226 OTDR trace, 298 test reference cords, 170 409 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook asterisk in results, 79 attenuation coefficient OTDR custom limit, 355 OTDR result, 259 attenuation. See insertion loss. audible tone, 25 auto CertiFiber/SimpliFiber Pro far end source mode, 198 power meter, 213 auto length, 268 auto OTDR, 223 auto save, 56 auto wavelength far end source mode, 198 light source, 215 OTDR (real time trace), 269 power meter, 213 automatic increment, 56 Autotest asterisk in results, 79 count, 360 failures loss/length, 292 twisted pair, 131 far end source mode, 198 loopback mode, 190 loss/length settings, 170 results far end source mode, 205 loopback mode, 196 smart remote mode, 184 twisted pair, 78 smart remote mode, 178 twisted pair, 75 twisted pair settings, 71 averaging time, 272 AxTalk, 123 –B– backlight timer, 25 410 backscatter custom fiber type, 350 different values in a link, 297 OTDR setting, 224 bad patch cord, 77 battery care, 364 charging, 13 removal, 364 status, 14 storage, 364 bi-directional IDs for loss/length results, 189 loss/length setting, 172 loss/length tests, 206 OTDR tests, 264 –C– cable type (twisted pair), 72 calculated loss limit far end source mode, 206 loss/length test, 171 OTDR test, 225 calibration date, 360 cautions, 2, 3, 5, 6, 168 CDNEXT causes of failures, 135 results, 110 change ID screen smart remote mode, 331 twisted pair and single fibers, 321 change test, 317, 324 channel connections, 77 characteristic impedance, 98 check fiber connections far end source mode, 204 loopback mode, 195 smart remote mode, 183 cleaning case, 358 Index fiber connectors, 147 IBC cleaner, 150 touchscreen, 358 video probe, 367 CMRL, 109 common-mode signals, 112 compensate for launch/tail cords, 227 connector adapters on modules, 160 APC.See APC connectors. bad connector on HDTDX plot, 142 CertiFiber Pro module, 157 DSX CableAnalyzer module, 60 loss/length custom limit, 353 main Versiv unit, 10 OptiFiber Pro module, 219 OTDR connection quality, 236 remote Versiv Unit, 12 VFL, 290 connector loss loss/length custom limit, 353 OTDR custom limit, 354 connector type, 173 contact Fluke Networks, 8 core different sizes in a link, 297 scale on FiberInspector screen, 286 crossed pairs ac wire map, 130 causes, 131 wire map, 83 current series, 360 cursor copper test results plot, 93 HDTDR/HDTDX plots, 143 OTDR trace, 262 custom fiber type, 348 custom test limit loss/length test, 353 OTDR test, 354 custom twisted pair cable type, 345 customer support, 8 –D– DataCenter OTDR test, 223 date, 24 dB rules, 116 decimal separator, 24 default project, 58 delay skew causes of failures, 132 results, 86 diagnostic tab, 116 differential-mode signals, 112 display brightness, 26 cleaning, 358 how to use, 16 document only (test limit), 225 –E– echo. See ghost. EF-TRC, 167 ELFEXT. See ACR-F. ELTCTL causes of failures, 135 results, 115 encircled flux, 167 end 1/end 2 change the number, 322 enter names, 322 far end source mode, 204 merge far end source mode results, 204 power meter, 211 end event, 251 end threshold, 273 error message, 366 event details, 257 event table, 248 411 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook event types, 250 EventMap, 243 –F– FAIL causes of loss/length test failures, 292 causes of OTDR test failures, 294 causes of twisted pair test failures, 131 FAIL*, 79 far end source mode, 198 FaultMap test procedure, 275 purpose, 274 screen, 278 FEXT, 105 fiber type custom settings, 349 invalid, 367 loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 224 FiberInspector test procedure, 283 purpose, 281 screen, 284 fix later, 54 fixed length, 268 flash drive projects, 342 results, 305 flash drive for test results, 305 Fluke Networks contact, 8 Knowledge Base, 9 –G– gainer example on OTDR trace, 297 in the event table, 253 412 general connector type, 173 general fiber (OTDR test limit), 225 ghost event, 252 example on OTDR trace, 298 ghost source event, 252 –H– HDTDR analyzer, 135 HDTDR/HDTDX setting, 73 tools menu, 135, 139 HDTDX analyzer, 139 help (contact Fluke Networks), 8 hidden end event, 251 hidden event, 251 home screen CertiFiber Pro, 162 DSX CableAnalyzer, 64 no module attached, 19 OptiFiber Pro, 220 –I– i far end source mode, 206 OTDR event table, 249 TRC verification result, 167 twisted pair test results dB rules, 116 resistance, 89 ID set copy, 312 delete from a project, 312 delete imported ID set, 341 import, 340 make an ID set, 57, 315 maximum number of IDs, 338 next ID, 339 options, 54 setup screen, 318 IDs untested, 322 Index impedance, 98 index of refraction in custom fiber type, 350 loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 224 OTDR tests on long fibers, 393 insertion loss causes of failures, 133 results, 94 –J– jumper setting, 173 –K– keyboard, 22 Knowledge Base, 9 –L– language, 23 launch compensation about launch and tail cords, 226 methods, 227 turn on or off, 223 launch event shows when no cord is connected, 234 launch/tail cords connectors, 227 how to retract, 234 launch/tail events, 250 length index of refraction custom fiber type, 350 loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 224 loss/length custom limit, 353 used to calculate a loss limit, 171 OTDR custom limit, 354 results, 245 used to calculate a loss limit, 225 twisted pair causes of failures, 132 results, 85 link interface adapters about, 67 specifications, 371 LinkWare and LinkWare Stats, 30 loopback mode, 190 loss budget (loss/length custom limit), 353 loss event, 250 loss is negative, 166 loss threshold, 273 loss type (loss/length custom limit), 353 loss/km (loss/length custom limit), 353 loss/length bi-directional tests, 206 causes of test failures, 292 custom limit, 353 far end source mode, 198 loopback mode, 190 reference, 165 settings, 170 smart remote mode, 178 test reference cords, 167 –M– main tester, 10 maintenance, 357 manual OTDR how to use, 270 settings, 223 memory capacity, 27, 390 413 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook flash drive projects, 343 results, 305 status, 27, 308 upload results to a PC, 306 view results, 299 microscope (FiberInspector), 281 module connectors, 156 OTDR, 219 twisted pair, 60 install or remove, 28 loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 223 twisted pair setting, 72 MPO modules custom limit, 353 total connections, 175 –N– N/A custom limit, 355 in LinkWare results, 116 OTDR port, 250 OTDR results end event, 251 limit, 258 margin, 258 overall loss, 244 segment attenuation, 259 twisted pair results length, 87 LinkWare, 116 NEXT causes of failures, 134 HDTDX analyzer, 139 results, 99 next ID about next ID sets, 339 how to change, 321 no fiber event, 254 414 no signal event, 254 number format, 24 number of connectors/splices loss/length setting, 174 OTDR setting, 226 NVP changing, 346 differences, 86 setting, 72 –O– open ac wire map, 129 causes on twisted pair, 131 far end source mode, 204 HDTDR plot, 138 loopback mode, 195 smart remote mode, 183 wire map, 81 operator, 21 optical return loss, 256 custom limit, 354 options and accessories, 367 OTDR auto, 223 causes of test failures, 294 cursors on trace, 143, 262 custom limit, 354 do an OTDR test, 76, 238 event details, 257 event table, 248 event types, 250 EventMap, 243 launch and tail cords, 226 manual, 223, 270 overall fiber result, 255 port connection quality, 236 port event, 250 real-time trace, 268 settings, 222 trace, 260 Index out of range event, 254 outlet configuration, 33, 39, 73 overall fiber result, 255 overall loss, 244 loss/length custom limit, 353 OTDR custom limit, 354 –P– parts, 367 PASS*, 79 patch cord bad patch cord message, 77 on HDTDR plot, 138 on HDTDX plot, 142 in FaultMap test results, 274 OTDR connection, 227 performance tab, 84 permanent link connections, 76 plots (twisted pair) black limit line, 116 description, 92 store plot data, 72 PoE AC wire map setting, 73 do tests through a PoE device, 125 port connection quality, 236 power meter, 209 power-down timer, 25 project copy to another tester, 343 flash drive, 342 project screen, 310 purpose, 309 set up a project, 310 propagation delay causes of failures, 132 results, 86 PS ACR-F causes of failures, 134 results, 108 PS ACR-N causes of failures, 134 results, 103 PS NEXT causes of failures, 134 results, 101 PSACR. See PS ACR-N. PSELFEXT. See PS ACR-F. pulse width, 271 –R– range, 271 real time trace, 268 receive event, 250 reference far end source mode, 200 good values, 166 loopback mode, 192 smart remote mode, 180 twisted pair, 70 when to set fiber, 165 twisted pair, 70 reference method, 173 reflectance (in custom limit), 354 reflection event, 250 remote tester battery status, 14 connectors, keys, LEDs, 12 LEDs, 12 version information, 358 replacement parts, 367 resistance causes of failures, 132 results, 88 unbalance, 89 results add to a saved result, 302 delete, rename, move, 304 flash drive, 305 415 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook replace a saved result, 303 results screen, 300 table or plot, 90 upload to a flash drive, 305 upload to a PC, 306 return loss causes of failures, 134 HDTDR analyzer, 135 results, 96 reversed pair causes, 131 wire map, 83 –S– safety information, 2 scale for fiber core, 286 segment attenuation coefficient OTDR custom limit, 355 OTDR result, 259 self test, 358 service, 365 settings loss/length, 170 OTDR, 222 twisted pair, 71 user preferences, 23 shield test, 72 short ac wire map, 129 causes, 131 HDTDR plot, 138 wire map, 82 smart remote mode, 178 software update, 358 version, 358 specifications calibration, 389 CertiFiber Pro module, 379 certifications and compliance, 389 416 dimensions, 391 display, 391 DSX CableAnalyzer module, 370 environmental and regulatory, 369, 392 headset jack, 391 memory, 390 OptiFiber Pro module, 382 power, 389 RJ45 connector, 390 serial interfaces, 390 VFL, 388 video probe, 388 weight, 391 splice bi-directional OTDR test, 265 EventMap, 246 gainer event table, 253 OTDR trace, 297 loss/length custom limit, 353 OTDR custom limit, 354 real time trace, 268 splices loss/length setting, 174 OTDR setting, 226 splices setting, 175 split pair causes, 131 HDTDX plot, 142 wire map, 82 stop the manual OTDR test, 270 storage, 364 store plot data, 72 system log, 366 –T– tailing example, 296 Index in attenuation measurement, 259 resistance, 89 units for length measurements, 25 CertiFiber Pro modules, 208 DSX CableAnalyzer modules, 122 –V– talk TCL causes of failures, 135 results, 112 test limit black limit line on plots, 116 loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 225 twisted pair setting, 72 test reference cords encircled flux, 167 how to select, 167 length, 174 test setup copy, 312 delete, 312 test type loss/length setting, 172 OTDR setting, 223 time, 24 total connections setting, 174 touchscreen cleaning, 17 how to use, 16 TRC length, 174 TRC verification, 167 twisted pair See also Autotest reference, 70 results, 78 settings, 71 test, 76 version information, 358 visual fault locator (VFL), 287 –W– warnings in loss/length test results, 187 in OTDR test results, 256 maintenance, 357 safety, 2 wavelengths, 224 weak signal event, 254 wire map AC wire map results, 125 setting, 73 causes of failures, 131 results, 80 –U– unbalance impedance, 112 417 Versiv Cabling Certification Product Family Technical Reference Handbook 418
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
Download PDF
advertisement